PART OF DV BARTAS, ENGLISH AND FRENCH, AND IN HIS OWNE KINDE OF Verse, so neare the French Englished, as may teach an English-man French, or a French-man English.
With the Commentary of S. G. S.
By WILLIAM L'ISLE of Wilburgham, Esquier for the Kings Body.
LONDON, Printed by IOHN HAVILAND. M.DC.XXV.
A Pastorall Dedication to the King.
So for Calliope: What for the rest?
On, on to th'next.
As I haue heard report, such if it be,
(Fy-on that If)
Deserues it only she.
Enough for them to do.
Nay, vse but Clio; leaue Melpomene.
Why leaue her out? a stately Muse is she.
To the Readers.
COnyes, whom Salomon reckons among the wise Little-ones vpon earth, do make many skraplets and profers on the ground, before they dig earnestly for their neast or litter; and writing-schollers draw first in blotting paper many a dash, roundell, and minime, before they frame the perfect letters that shall stand to their coppie: so entending some worke that may (if I be so happie) remain some while after me, many waies do I essay and try first my stile and pen; that according also to the wise rule of Horace, I may thereby iudge my selfe and discerne quid valeant humeri, quid ferre recusent. Nor do I trust my owne iudgement herein, so likely to be partiall; but commonly present my worke in writing, before it bee printed, vnto some Quintilius or other, whose noble disposition will, authoritie may, and learning is able to find fault and aduise me. Yet among the sundrie versets or prosets, which besides this, I haue or shall set-out, if you find some that sauour of my younger time; passe by them (I pray you) or affoord them the fauour, that my Quintilius doth, to let them passe, because they were the way that led me to a grauer kind: as also the grauest of humain Poetrie, [Page]brought me at last to the diuine; whereof I haue many Essayes, now almost readie for the presse. This translation of Salust du Bartas what present occasion draweth from me you may well perceiue: yet thinke me not herein Acta agere, to do that which was before done, and very well by Iosua Siluester; for it is in a diuers kind, and, many yeares ere he began, this had I lying by me: yea partly published in print (as Anno 1596, & Anno 1598) and dedicated to the late Noble Charles Earle of Nottingham. But now the cause why in this I beginne so abruptly, is for that I was loth to come neere the booke next aforegoing; which our late Soueraigne Lord King Iames in his youth so incomparably made English; yet had I a desire to fall vpon that braue commendation of our late Soueraigne Ladie Queene Elizabeth, and her people, in the second booke here, and that of France, in the third; both laid together betokning (as it were) some new bond of Loue shortly to come betwixt that Realme and this; which we all pray the Lord to prosper.
To make way then yet more for this mutuall acquaintance by communication of Language, thus much of that Noble Poet I thought meet to counterpage with French and English. Not all, both because the Kings happie match growing on so fast, I had no time to finish and print so great a volume; and for that I may [Page]say of this Author, as of Homer, know foure of his bookes, and know them all: for thus much onely may suffice (I presume) to helpe an Englishman vnderstand the whole French of Bartas, or a Frenchman the whole English of Siluestor. If you aske me why I keepe this kind of Hexameter verse, I need say no more, but that it is the same which the Author kept in the originall: and he doubtlesse, for the more graue, made choice thereof with great reason, according to the counsell of Horace, who aduiseth all writers, Descriptas seruare vices, operumque colores: his reason followes (which with little alteration of the verse I may hereto fitly applie)
And what is our English Pentameter but the same kind of verse which is vsed in our Comedi [...]s? Besides, I had a desire to trie how French and English would go hand in hand; for enter changeable helpe and teaching of the one by the other; now both Nations are so well inclined to learne and conferre together. For which purpose I found this worke very fit, and readiest on such a sodain to present my Lord the King withall, at the here celebration of his marriage. And herefore onely, if there were none other cause, yet (gentle Readers) my hope is yee will hold me excused. I was about to end; but may not forget to let you vnderstand, that this Bartassian [Page]verse (not vnlike herein to the Latin Pantameter) hath euer this propertie, to part in the mids betwixt two wordes: so much doe some French prints signifie, with a stroke interposed, as here in the first two pages you may see, for example. The neglect of this hath caused many a braue Stanza in the F [...]irie Queene to end but harshly, which might haue beene preuented at the first, but now the fault may be sooner found then amended. I doe but note it vnto you, that you may the better obserue the true cadence of this our Authors verse: and so craning your fauourable construction of these, and all my like endeauours, I rest willing to doe you what further seruice I am able.
Fin d' Adam, & commencement de Noe. The end of Adam, and beginning of Nöe.
Annotations vpon the end of Adam and beginning of Noe.
1 THe wining Territorie. The verses are graue, and full of maiestie, and agreeable to the person that speakes, Adam sheweth vnto his sonne in how many daies the world was created; and how many ages it shall endure. To giue more weight to this declaration, he brings in the first of Mankind, to speake thereof as it were by the rauishing power of the holy Ghost; for that his purpose was to ioine to the former discourse of Creation, the sequele of diuers ages of the world, which Adam could not speake of, but by Spirit of prophecie.
2 That first. As God created Heauen and Earth in sixe daies, and rested the seuenth; so Adam shewes that the world shall continue sixe ages, and in the seuenth shall be the eternall rest of the Church triumphant in Heauen. Some there are, both old and new writers, who discoursing on this number of six, and constring to their purpose the saying, That a thousand yeares are as one day before the Lord, haue imagined that the world from beginning to the end shall fulfill the number of six thousand yeares; to wit, two thousand before the law, two thousand vnder the law, and two thousand vnder Grace. But this opinion hath so little foundation in holy Scripture, that contrariwise it is refuted rather by expresse testimonie of Christ, who saith, the latter day is vnknowne both to men and Angels. Now that which the Poet propoundeth here concerning the worlds six ages, not defining the number of yeres, it is founded in the word of God. The first age then begins from Adam and continues till Noe, 1656 yeares. The second from Noe who built the Arke, and planted the Vine, till Abraham, 292 yeares. The third lasteth from Abraham, the great sheepheard drawne out of Chalden, who obaying the voice of God was readie to sacrifice his onely sonne Isaac, from Abraham (I say) vnto Da [...]id 942 yeares. The fourth, from Dauid the valiant and nimble sheepheard, who with one cast of his sling ouerthrew the Gyant Goliah; and of sheepheard was made King, renowned aboue others; who was also a great Prophet, and excellent in Poetrie and Musicke; vnto the taking of Ierusalem vnder Zedechias; who after hee had seene his children slaine, and the people of ludea led capture into Babilon, had his eyes put out; containes 475 yeares. Now, from the destruction of the first Temple built by Solomon, vnto the destruction of the second Temple destroyed by the Romans, about fortie yeares after the death of Christ, some reckon 656 yeares; and that's the fift age. The si [...]t holds on from Christ to the worlds end. If this latter age last yet but 51 yeares longer, the Lord [Page 6]shall haue attended it with as long patience as he did the former world destroyed by the blood; but the destruction of this world shall be by fire, Hereof see what Saint Peter saith in the third Chapter of his second Epistle.
3 What shall I hope (alas.) In all the rest of this discourse vpon the first day of the second weeke, the Poet makes a [...]iefe of the Historie in holy Scripture contained from about the end of the fourth Chapter of Genesis, to the end of the seuenth. Adams first consideration here is of his descendants by Cain: who giuen wholly to the world, forgot to exercise themselues in godlinesse and true justice: Whereupon there ensued such vngedlinesse, vnrighteousnesse, and debauched life, as brought the del [...]ge and vniuersall flood vpon them. Adam foreseeth that such as shall be liuing in the latter age (wherinto we are fallen) are like to be wondrous peruerse, sithence his so neere successors, euen in his life time, durst prouoke the iust Iudge of All.
The Poets haue fained foure ages of the world, the first of Gold, the second of Siluer, the third of Brasse, the fourth of Iron: And we may put thereto a fift, mingled with Iron and Clay. They said the first was of Gold, for the abundance of all good things: for then was there more knowledge and wisedome in the soule of man; Iustice and all other vertues were more honored, mens bodies were much more big, strong, and vigorous: and so much the longer liuing, by how much the lesse they need care to maintaine health. After this life so commodious and ensie, there followed another more troublesome; and, after that, a third and a fourth, declining still by little and little, from worse to worse. Compare ye the peaceable time of Adam with the broyles and m [...]ssakers of these our dayes, and you shall see plainely in the one Gold, and in the other Iron. Nay euen in the daies of Hesiod and Ouid, many hundred yeares agoe, the Iron age is discouered by their complaints. But in that Golden age, before the flood, when Adam, Seth, Enos, Henech, and other excellent Patriarches liued in the schoole of God, raigned euer good order: or, if there were any disorder, as in Cain and his line, which corrupted the posteritie of Seth; that same Enos and other good men found remedie for it. Whereas now a daies vice it selfe is held a vertue, and right is tried onely by the swords point: so are both the bodies and soules of men decayed and abased. But, least these my notes turne to a Satire, let vs stay them here with the 12 verse of the 12 chapter of the Apocalips, well agreeing with this latter age. Wo to you inhabitants of the Earth and Sea, for the Diuell is come downe vnto you, which hath great wroth, knowing his time is short.
4 Ha traitor and rebell Soule. For example of vice and wickednesse, he noteth Lamech, mentioned in the fourth and fift Chapters of Gen. accusing him to haue tripled the Paire-of-man: that is, to haue brought in Poligamie, by marrying and hauing two wiues at once; so as contrarie to the Lords appointment (who of one body made two, and of two but one) he went about to ioyne three bodies in one: and whereas hee ought to haue but one wife, tooke two, viz. Ada and Tsilla. Beside this desiling the marriage [Page 7]bed (which the Apostle saith, Hebr. 13. is honourable among all men, and calles it the bed vndesiled) Lamech is here also accused, to haue embrued his sword with the bloud of his Grand-fathers Grand-father, that is, to haue killed Cain, of this descent see Gen. 4. where you shall sinde Lamech in the seuenth degree; counting Adam the first, and Cain the second, &c. Philo Judaus (Lib. de Praem [...]js & Poe [...]s) holds that Cain was not killed; but, as his offence was a thing neuer knowne before; so was it punished after a new fashion: and bearing a certain mark of Gods anger, languished in coutinuall misery, without hope of grace, or comfort. Certaine ancient Doctors giue Lamech the title of a Murderer & bloudy minded Man; and his menaces in the Text shew no lesse: hence it is that the Poet, after diuers others, hath gathered that Cain was killed by Lamech; some say purposely, some vnawares. But these Traditions hauing no ground in holy Scripture, and little concerning the stay of our faith; let the Poet say, and the Reader thinke what they will; Howbeit Muses sheweth plainly that this Lamech of Cains Posteritie was a cruell man, and giuen to his pleasure.
5 But Enos, O thou Saint. It is recorded by Moses, Genes. 4. Ch. the last verse, that vnto Seth the third sonne of Adam, was borne a sonne called Enos: and it followeth that then men began to call on the name of the Lord, as much to say, as then began a distinction apparent betweene the Church of God and the Race of Cain. For as much as Adam, Seth, Enos, and their Families only of all the World, called themselues the children of God, and reioyced in that name. The Poet so followes this exposition, that he ioynes in opinion with such as say, when Enos came into the world, Adam was 239. yeares old; and that then the Race of Cain was so multiplied, as the seruice of God began to be of small account, the due calling vpon his name neglected, and the doctrine of Sacrifices mis-vnderstood. Whereupon these good Patriarkes, perceiuing the disorder, opposed themselues against it, by all the best meanes they could. Some learned men there are, who consider the words of Moses otherwise, and as though in the time of Enos, some others, euen the descendents of Seth also, with whom the truth of God remained, began to be debauched in following the course of Cainites. Howsoeuer, most likely it is, that Enos and other good seruants of God by all meanes endeauoured to maintaine true righteousnesse and holinesse, and so much the rather, because they saw that issue of Cain giuen ouer wholly to the world. And hence it is that we reade in the sixt Chapter of Genesis, that the posteritie of Seth were called the Children of God; and there also, by the Daughters of Men are meant women descended of Cain.
6 See Euoch. Moses is briefe, but as graue and pithie as may be, speaking of the holy Patriarke Enoch, Gen. 5.22. Enoch after he begat Methusala, walked with God three hundred yeares; and begat sonnes and daughters. So Enoch walked with God and appeared no more; for God tooke him. To walke with God, is to please God, as the Apostle expounds it, Hebr. 11. Hereto the Poet affords his learned Paraphrase. As that Enoch dying to himselfe, and liuing vnto the Lord, was exercised daily in meditation of the ioyes of heauen, and raised himself, as it were, aboue the world with the wings of faith, fasting & prayer. [Page 8]As also the Apostle saith, By saith Enoch was taken away, that he might not see death; neither was he found; for God had taken him away. Saint Iu [...]e, in his generall Epistle, saith that Enoch the seuenth from Adam, prophecied against the wicked, saying: Behold the Lord commeth with thousands of his Saints, to giue Iudgement against all men, and to rebuke all the vngodly among them, of all the wicked deeds, which they haue vngodly committed; and of all their cruell speeches, which wicked sinners haue spoken against him. The Poet holds (according to the opinion of many Diuines, both old and new) that Enoch was taken both soule and body vp into heauen, for a manifest witnesse, to the former world, of euerlasting life. For this was no such inuisible departure or disappearance as is of the soule from the body. And whereas the Apostle saith, hee was not found; it shewes, that such, as then liued in the world, laid to heart this miracle, and after diligent search made, the godly were much comforted thereby, as the wicked could not but be much dismayed. Moreouer, the Chronicles doe reckon but fiftie six yeares betwixt the death of Adam, and the taking vp of Enoch: and as the death of the one taught all After-commers to thinke on their weaknesse; so the life of the other made the godly more assured of life euerlasting, and glory of body and soule for euer. I desire each Christian Reader to consider well the fift Chapter of Genesis; that he may well compare the times of these Patriarkes, and marke how long some of them liued with their fore and after-beers, whereby they might the better learne of the one, and teach the other, what was the true seruice of God.
7 Men of vnbounded lust. Although the first world endured 669. yeares after the Assumption of Enoch; yet true is the Poets saying, that after this Patriarke was gone, all godlinesse, holinesse and righteousnesse began to decay; howsoeuer Noe, and his Father Lamech, and his Grand-father Methusala (who deceased not many moneths before the Floud, but in the same yeare) did set themselues mainly against those disorders; and shewed themselues, euen by way of preaching, to be as it were the Heraulds of Iustice. Moses shewes plainly the particulars throughout the whole fift Chapter, and, in the beginning of the sixt, what horrible sinnes the descendants of Seth committed by ioyning themselues to those of Cain: as first the neglect of Gods word; then, Tyranny, violence, oppression, iniustice, wantonnesse, polygamie, or hauing more wiues at once than one, and all wickednesse growne to a height altogether vncorrigible: so as the estate both of Church, Kingdome, and Family, were all turned vpside downe; and, to be short, a deluge of impiety and filth had couered the face of the whole earth.
8 Of Gyants (God knowes what.) Moses saith (Gen. 6.4.) that in those daies were Giants vpon the earth, and chiefly after that the sons of God (which were the posterity of Seth) grew familiar with the young women descended of the line of Cain; and had issue by them. He saith also that these Giants were mightie men, which in old time were of great renowne. Some apply the word Giant to the exceeding stature of those men, whereby they made all afraid that beheld them; Others, whom the Poet followes, to the Tyranny and violence of such as Irued immediatly before the Deluge: among whom some there were, who bore all afore them, and became a terrour to [Page 9]all others. Goropius in his Antiquities, handleth at large this point concerning Gyants; especially in his second booke entituled Gygantomachia. 1. Chassagnon hath answered him in a Latine Treatise, where he disputeth of the exceeding height these Gyants &c.
9 Then God who saw. The causes of the Deluge, the fore-tellin [...], and execution thereof, are set downe by Moses briefly, but sufficiently, and hereto may be applied that which our Lord and Sa [...]iour saith, as touching these latter times, which he compareth to the time of Noe, Matth. 24. As also that of St. Peter in his first generall Epistle, 3.20. and in his second, 2.5. Lay also to this prediction of Adam, the description of the generall Floud, set downe by the Poet at the end of the second Day of his first Weeke. All this requires a full Commentary; but this may suffice in briefe.
The second day is called Noe; because the most remarkeable things, in all the time of that holy Father and his successors vntill Abraham, is there represented in foure Bookes following, and thus entitled: Th' Arche, Babylon, Colonies, and Columnes or Pillars: whereof the first is as it were a briefe Commentary vpon diuers passages of the six, seuen, eight, and ninth Chapters of Genesis. But heare the Poet.
L'ARCHE. The first Booke of Noe, called the Arke.
Annotations vpon the first Booke of Noe, called the Arke.
1 DIvine verse. He complaines of the miseries of our time, of his bodies crasinesse, and care of houshold affaires, which hinder his bold designes, and make his Muse fall (as it were) from heauen to earth. He calls the verse diuine because of the subiect matter which he handleth; acknowledging withall, that, as Ouid saith, Carmina proueniunt anime deducta sereno: and this serenitie or quietnesse of spirit, which is all in all for a Christian Poem, is a gift from Heauen. And therefore this our Poet, In stead of calling vpon his Muse (which is but himselfe, or helpe of profane inuentions) looketh vp rather vnto that power, from whence commeth euery good and perfect gift, that is the father of light.
2 Oh rid me. This is a zealous inuocation, and well beseeming the Authors intent: which also is enriched with a daintie comparison. For verily the chiefe grace of a Poem is, that the Poet begin not in a straine ouer high to continue, and so grow worse and worse to the end: but rather that he increase and aduance himselfe by little and little, as Virgil among the Latin Poets most happily hath done. Horace also willeth a good writer, in a long-winded worke, ex sumo dare lucem, that is, to goe-on and finish more happily then he began. Who so doth otherwise, like is to the blustring wind, which the longer it continues, growes lesse and lesse by degrees: but the wise Poet will follow rather the example of Riuers, which from a small spring, the farther they run grow on still to more and more streame and greatnesse.
3 As our foresire foretold. Saint Peter in his 2. chapt. of his 2. Ep. calls Noe the Herault or Preacher of righteousnesse; and in the eleauenth chapter of the Epistle to the Hebrewes, it is said that Noe, being aduertised from God of things not yet seene, conceined a reuerent seare; and built the Arch for safegard of his familie: through the which Arch he condemned the world, and was made heire of the righteousnesse, which is by sa [...]th. By these places may be gathered, that Noe laying hold on the truth of Gods threats and promises (as Moses also sheweth in the sixt of Gen.) prepared materials for the Arch; and in building the same, did, as well by worke, as word of a Preacher, condemne the impiety and wickednesse of men; warning them of [Page 20]the iudgement which hung ouer their heads; which also was put in execution at the very time appointed by the Almighty.
4 When all were once i'th' Arke. This historie of the Deluge our Poet had before touched in the end of the second day of his first weeke; which passage I the Translator thought good here to insert, that the description might be the fuller. These verses, and the rest to the end of this booke, shew vs the fearefull iudgement of God vpon the sinnes of that former world; set downe first by Moses in the 6.7. and 8. chapters of Genesis. Were I to write a full commentary thereof, I should discourse of Noes Arke, and diuers questions which present themselues concerning that rare subiect, with the precedents, consequents and coincidents: but I touch lightly these things, to draw the Readers care, and make still more and more knowne vnto him, the great learning and Art shewed in this diuine Poem. To see how our Author is his crafts-master, let a man conferre this decription with that of Ouid in the first booke of his Metam: concerning the Deluge of Deucalion. Some of his verses I thought good here to set downe, for encouragement of such as haue leysure, more neerely to consider, and compare the French with the Latine.
Then speaking of the land and out-let of Riuers, thus:
See the rest of Ouid; who hath not so exactly described these things, as our Poet.
5 Nereus. By this word he means the Sea, which at the Deluge ouerflowed the whole Earth; because it was not then held within the proper bounds thereof by the powerfull goodnesse and prouidence of the Creator. Ouid expresseth it thus; Omnia pontus erant; deerant quoquelittora ponto. Virgil, thus; Spumeus atque imo Nereus ciet aequora sundo. Natalis Comes in his Mythologie, lib. 8. cap. 6. hath much of Nereus and the Nereides: where also he giues a reason why the Poets so call the Sea.
6 The Sea-Calues. So I translate [le Manat] for the Veal-like flesh thereof; though this be indeed a great Sea-fish described by Rondeletius in the 18. chapter of his sixt booke. He is also like a young Bull with a broad backe, and a very thicke skin: they say he weigheth more then two oxen are well able to draw. His flesh (as I said before) commeth neere the taste of Yeale, but it is fatter, and not so well relished: he will be made as tame [Page 21]as a dog; but hath a shrewd remembrance of such as hurt him. P. Marlyr of Millaine, in the 8. booke of his 3. Decade, tels great wonders of one that was tamed and made so familiar with a certaine Cassike or Lord of India: that he would play and make sport like an Ape; and sometimo would carry ten Indians at once on his backe, and passe or ferry them in that wise from one side of a great Lake there to the other. And for as much as hauing foure feet like a Sea-dog, he liued on the land as well as in the water: he would now and then wrestle with Indians, and take meat at their hand; but would in no wise be reconciled vnto the Christians there, because one of them (whom he knew, it seems, very strangely, by his face and clothes) had once strooke him with a lance, though hurt him not, by reason of his hard and thicke hyde. Ouiede, in the 13. booke and 10. chap. f his History, describes one, but not as a creature liuing both at Sea and Land; nor yet foure-footed. Howbeit he saith the name of Manat is giuen to this fish by the Spaniards, because he hath (as t'were) manus duas, two hands neere his head, which doe serue him for fynnes to swim withall: he tels further many things of singular note, and that this Manat or Seabullocke is found about the Isle of Hispaniola. As for other fishes here mentioned, they shall be handled in another place hereafter; but who so desires to know more of the history and nature of them, let him reade Gesner, Rondeletius, & Bellon. So much out of the second day of the first weeke: Now let vs goe on with this booke of the Arke.
7 Good Noe. In the history of Moses, Gen. 7. there are certaine points worthy noting, to proue that the faithfull and holy Patriarck Noes heart failed him not, though he saw then the Arke tossed vp and downe the boundlesse waters of this generall Flood; though all the fountaines of the great deepe broke forth, and the flood-gates of Heauen were opened, so as the raine fell amaine and without ceasing vpon the face of the earth forty daies and forty nights together; and the water swelled fiftie cubits aboue the highest of all hills. The first is, that he entred the Arke himselfe with his wife and children, and their wiues also, at the commandement of God. The second is, that, after all the beasts, paire by paire, were also come in, God himselfe shut the doore vpon them. For this shewes that the holy Patriarke with a liuely faith obeyed the voice of God, and vpon his only wise prouidence wholly rested. And therefore good reason had the Poet to set downe such holy exercises, as were likely to be vsed by Noe, being now close prisoner (as it were) for the space of a whole yeare and ten daies: as may be gathered by the 11. and 13. verses of the seauenth chapter of Genesis; and by the 13. and 14. verses of the chapter following. The summe of his discourse is grounded vpon consideration of the great mercy of God, who neuer forgetteth his children and such as feare him and rest vpon his goodnesse. This goodnesse and mercy well shewed it selfe vnto Noe and his, among so many fearefull shapes of death; while in the Arke they were so preserued aliue from the Deluge, together with the whole seminarie of the world next to ensue. The Almighty now held all creatures obedient vnto the Patriarke, as he had before disposed them to come [Page 22]and range themselues by couples into the Arke, where they were, during this imprisonment, to be fed and kept cleane. Let the Reader duely consider how many wayes the faith, patience, and constancie of Noe was exercised in so waighty a charge; and how needfull it was, that God, who had shut vp his seruant in this prison of wood, should be there also with him from time to time, to strengthen and make him rich in faith, as hee was; whereby he onercame all these dangers. God therefore doubtlesse was the Patron of his ship; the sterne, Load starre, Ancor and Hauen of this Arke, sloating amid the waters now hurried after a strange manner. To this purpose saith a learned Father: Noah iactatur procellis, nec meigitur; serpentibus & beslijs sociatur, nec terretur; ei serae colla submittunt, & alites famulantur. It was the great mercy of God toward Noe, that hee gaue him the skill and knowledge how to fit the seuerall places in the Arke for the creatures and their food: as also, that vnder one man, and so few more as were saued with him, he held in obedience so many beasts, and (for the most part) one contrary to another; that the men were not cho [...]ked vp with this close ayre, and ill sauour of excrements: that amid so many fearefull apprehensions they were able to keepe life and soule together. But the blessing of God is the stay and sure hold of all his children.
8 But Cham. I will not speake here now of the questions arising about the time when began, or how long continued the Flood; nor curiously examine the Hebrew words; lest these Annotations grow too long. And the Poet hath chosen matter of more importance to be considered. I haue said else-where, that it graceth much a Poem, where the certame truth appeares not, there to stand vpon likelyhoods. Cham shewed himselfe a profane wretch and a scosser straight after the Flood; whereupon both he and his posteritie were accursed. The Poet therefore with great probabilitie supposeth he could not long conceale and hold-in the poyson whereof his heart was full: but began to vent and vomit it euen in the Arke: Noe then, a man endued with the feare of God, was (surely) not silent the space of a whole yeare and ten dayes; and his care was not employed altogether vpon the beast: it must needs be therefore that he spent some time in teaching and comforting his familie. Cham was certainly gracelesse, and had no feeling of the Spirit; and fitly then doth the Poet personate in him all that are profane striuers against the iudgements of God. For whatsoeuer is here imputed vnto Cham, may be gathered for likely, by that which he and his posteritie did after the Deluge. Noe who liued yet three hund [...]ed and fiftie yeares longer, returned (it seemes) from the Armenian hills, where the Arke staid, into his own former habitation, about Damascus, where his fore-fathers were buried. It is held for certaine that Sem also came againe thither; and that his issue peopled the lands thence reaching toward the East & the South; Cham drew to the South & West; Iaphet to the North and West; whereof reade yee the 10. chap. of Genesis. Cham had one sonne called Cus, whose posteritie inhabited a part of Arabia, and that of Ethiopia which is vnder Egypt: another called Mitsraim, of whom came the Egyptians; and another called Canaan, father of the Cananites. [Page 23]He had also Put, a fourth sonne; but of his posteritie Moses hath not a word. Iosephus, in the sixt chapter of his first booke of Antiquities, saith he peopled Lybia. And it was indeed in the sandie deserts thereof that the children of Cham held the Temple and Oracle of Iupiter Hammon, or Chammon. For the doctrine of truth by little and little being corrupted, and at last quite abolished amongst them (as among the Cananites the Scripture shewes Idolaters, Magitians, and persons euery way debauched and profane) these now blind and ignorant of the true God, make to themselues a God; and giue him a double name: one drawne from the name of the true God Ichoua, turned into Jupiter; and the other from their great Auncestor Cham. After this, the Deuill plaid terrible pranks in this Temple; and it became the most renowmed among the Gentiles; as you may reade in the second booke of Herodotus. And it is not vnlikely that Cham, euen at the time of the Floud, was plotting in his heart for such honours, to be done him by his posteritie, preiudiciall to the glory of Almighty God. As for his obiections here, they tend all (as all Chamites or Atheists reasons doe) first to controll the wise and vnblameable prouidence of the All good and Almighty God. Secondly, to shake the foundation of deuout humilitie in his Church. Thirdly, to censure both the mercy and iustice of the Lord. Fourthly, to make the order of Nature his buckler, to keepe off all apprehension of the vengeance of God; whose wayes, though the wicked thinke to follow them with naturall reason, are all past finding out, as witnesseth the Prophet Isay and S. Paul.
9. Fie Father. I come now to set downe in briefe the reproches, and foule speeches vttered here by Cham, whereof I need say but little, because the Reader may very easily distinguish them; sithence there is nothing in the Poets words, but easie to be vnderstood. The chiefe point is to consider well of Noes answers; which I haue one by one obserued as they stand in the Text.
10. By this the father gauld. After he hath witnessed his griefe in preface, hee bestowes vpon this scoffer such titles as he deserued; and then layes open the well-head of Atheisme; which is, for man to trust ouermuch in himselfe, and little regard what is taught by the Spirit of God: then foretelling the miserable end of all Atheists, he answers the obiections of Cham very punctually; enriching and beautifying his discourse with descriptions, comparisons, inductions and proofes necessarie; which well considered, afford much instruction, and comfort vnto men of an vpright heart. The two last answers are very remarkable; whereunto the Patriarke most fitly adioynes the calling on the name of God; of purpose to shew, vnto whom the faithfull ought to flie in all their troubles and tentations. I will not adde hereunto what Iosephus hath in the first of his Antiquities, because there are many things little to the purpose, and such as sort not with the state and maiestie of that sacred historie set downe by Moses. Something it is that Philo Iudaeus hath written of Moses and the Deluge in his second booke of the life of Moses toward the end. Vpon this historie of the Flood haue the Heathen people forged that fable of Deucalion, described by Ouid in the first of his Metamorphosis. But in these answers, by our Author put vpon Noc, the Reader may finde wherewithall to stop the mouth of all Atheists & Epicures, which are so bold to censure all that the holy Scripture saith, as well of the Essence and Nature of God, as of his workes; whether they concerne the creation and preseruation of the world, with the redemption of Mankinde; or his iust iudgements vpon the profane and reprobate vnbeleeuers.
11. Thus Noah. In the beginning of the 8. Chap. of Gen. Moses reports that God remembred Noe and euery beast, and all the cattell that were with him in the Arke; and made a wind passe vpon the earth; and the waters ceased. This the Poet expoundeth, giuing by the way very proper Epithites vnto the winds: and such also as are mentioned in the Psalmes 18. and 104. This wind dried the earth by degrees, and caused the waters to retire into [Page 25] their proper place of deepe Sea and Chanels; for the waters enterlaced with the earth make but one globe: And though at the Deluge, by Gods appointment, they went out far beyond their bounds to drowne the wicked; yet when the same God would deliuer his seruant Noe out of danger, at his command they remasse themselues into their wonted heap, furthered thereunto by the winds; and there continue so setled, that they passe [Page 26] not the bounds of an ordinarie ebbe and flow. This is done by the power of God, and for the promise he made to Noe, that there should be no more generall Flood, to destroy the earth.
12. And th'Arke. The Poet here calls it the Holy Carraque, as built by the commandement of God, and containing his Church. On the seuenth day of the seuenth moneth (saith Moses, Gen. 8.4.) rested the Arke vpon the Mountaines of Ararat. Some by this name vnderstand the great Armenia; others, the top of Caucasus. So Goropius, who thereupon discourseth at large in the 5. booke of his Antiquities, entitled Indo-Scythica. Iosephus, in his first, sheweth what thought Berosus, Nicolaus Damascenus, and others very auncient concerning the Arke; but followeth the first opinion. The Poet contents himselfe here to signifie, and expresse only in generall, some very high hill.
13. Now Noahs heart reioyc'd. From the end of the seuenth moneth to the end of the ninth (saith Moses) the waters began to abate daily more and more; and on the first day of the tenth moneth (that is, eight moneths and thirteene dayes after the Flood began) the tops of the hills appeared: so then already were the waters soonke aboue fifteene cubits. This fust made the Patriarke be of good hope. For after forty dayes, he opened the window of the Arke, and let goe the Rauen; which went and came, till the waters were dried from the surface of the earth. He sent out also a Doue to try if they were yet further abated; but the Doue not finding where to rest the sole of her foot, return [...]d vnto him againe into the Arke: for the waters were yet ouer the whole earth, and he reached out his band, and tooke her to him into the Arke. And when he had waited yet seauen dayes longer, he sent out the Doue againe, and in the euening shee returned vnto him, hauing in her mouth an Oliue-leafe, which shee bad plucked, &c. I haue recited the Text of Moses, whereupon the Expositors discoursing are wont to shew, wherefore Noah sent-out the Rauen and the Doue rather then any other birds: and why the Doue after the Rauen, and thrice. He knew full well the nature of these two was fit for the discouery; and went on with a discreet feare, attending, in all that he did, the manifest declaration of Gods will, touching his comming forth of the Arke. He had also a strong [Page 31] hope and confidence in the goodnesse of God, now prouing the patience and constancie of his seruant; and strengthning him still more and more by those meanes of discouery. And although the Doue at last staid and returned not vnto him; the waters being dayed from the earth; yet would he not come forth of the Arke, but contented himselfe to remoue the couering thereof, and behold the dry land round about him; and staid so 27. dayes longer, expecting the will and pleasure of the same God, to call him out of the Arke, which commanded him to enter into it. A singular example of obedience and reuerence due vnto the Almighty. As for the rest, the ancient Diuines haue at large allegorized vpon this Doue and the Oliue leafe, for a token of peace betwixt God and his Church: as also vpon the resemblance, that this deliuerie hath, with our redemption by Iesus Christ. These are contemplations of good vse, whereof the Poet maketh a briefe in speaking of the Oliue. Here it may suffice to haue touched them in a word, and leaue the Reader to meditate thereupon. Whom I wish also to peruse the third chapter of the 1. Epist. of S. Peter, and see what the Apostle there saith concerning the correspondence of Baptisme and the Deluge.
14. Although the Flood. When Noe had patiently attended many dayes after the surface of the Earth began to waxe drie; God spoke vnto him (Gen. 8.15. &c.) saying, Come out of the Arke, thou and thy wife, and thy sonnes and their wiues with thee. Bring forth with thee euery beast that is with thee, of all flesh, both foule and cattell; and euery thing that creepeth and moueth vpon the earth. Then Noe came forth, and his sonnes, and his wife, and his sonnes wiues with him. Euery beast, euery creeping thing, and euery fowle; all that moueth vpon the earth, after their kinds, went out of the Arke; as it were out of a prison most noysome and deadly, but for the presence and singular fauour of the Lord, who preserueth both man and beast, as the Psalmist saith. Here are many things to be admired: Noe and all his come forth safe and sound; the beasts also come forth without preying one vpon another; and they retire themselues to their seuerall haunts; their dens, nests, and places sit for them: and he retaineth what was requisite for sacrifice.
15. Here yet the damned Crew. Before he goe-on, he shewes what certaine profane wretches doe obiect, who make doubt of this history, concerning the Deluge; because they cannot conceiue how it is possible that the Arke, being but 300. cubits long and 50. broad, and 30. high, should liue (it is the Sea-mans phrase) so many moneths, in so great a storme of wind, raine and violence of waters, with so heauy a charge; and containe so many creatures together with their competent food and fodder; sithence the greatest Gallion vpon the Sea, hath hardly stoage for the nourishment of a Horse, an Elephant, a Cammell, a Bull, and a Rhinoceros, the space of ten moneths. The Poet hath diuers answers to this obiection. First, that the mungrell beasts, of what sort soeuer since engendred (as Mules, Leopards, and other like, that Nature daily brings forth) were not in the Arke. And this may be gathered out of the very text of Moses; who speaks of the simple and true kindes, not the mingled or mungrell sort; as all Expositors agree. The second is, that the Arke (because it contained so many cubits geometricall) was able to receiue of all the true and simple kinds, wylde, tame, creeping, flying, both male and female. This is briefly said; but we will speake thereof a word more. Moses hath recorded (in the 6. chap. of Gen. ver. 14. &c.) that God, hauing a purpose to destroy the world, said vnto Noe, Make thee an Arke of Gopher-wood (which is thought to be a sort of Pine or Cedar) Thou shalt make cabins in the Arke, and shalt pitch it inside and out with pitch. And thus thou shalt make it: The length thereof shall be 300 cubits, and the breadth 50 cubits, and the height 30 cubits: a window shalt thou make in the Arke, and in a cubit shalt thou finish it abone; and thou shalt set a doore in the side thereof: And thou shalt make it with a low, second, and third roome, or storie. The timber then of the Arke being of such a fast and sad wood, not easily rotting, was like to hold out: and I imagine it was a kinde of Cedar, such as Plinie nameth in the 15. chap. of his 13. booke, saying, Hanc quoque materiam, siccatam mari, duritie incorrupta spissari, nec vllo modo vehementiùs. 1. That this kinde of timber, dryed with the Sea, more then any wayes else, growes so sad and hard, that it cannot rot. But sithence the Commentors vpon this place differ much in the interpretation of this word Gopher; which in all the Old Testament is not found but here; I leaue the Reader, that will be exact and curious, to search it out himselfe. As for the rest, it is not to be doubted, but that Noe endowed with a great measure of the holy Spirit, and with exquisite wisdome, did herein euen to the full conceiue and execute the commandement of God: So as the Arke (that is, the close or couered ship) was surely made and finished according to the proportion set downe by Moses: and that, of choice, well seasoned, and most durable materials, 100 yeare a preparing, as may be gathered by comparing the 7. chap. and 6. verse, with the 6.10. and the 5.32. of Genesis. And for as much as the whole businesse was managed by the expresse ordinance of God, who gaue a secret instinct to the beasts, both cleane and vncleane, to enter after Noe by payres into the Arke, I conclude there was roome distinct and sufficient both for them and their prouisions. Apelles an auncient Heretike, and the disciple of a most vngodly Master called Marcion, hauing presumptuously controuled the bookes of Moses, gaue occasion to some of the Fathers, and chiefly Origen, among other points, to treat of the capacitie and largenesse of Noes Arke: wherein he accounts each cubit Geometricall; the Quadrate whereof is as much as six other cubits. And this, I. Buteo, a learned Mathematician of Daulphine, very cunningly declares, in a treatise purposely written of the Arke of Noe: where he proues to the full whatsoeuer may be questioned concerning that admirable peece of Architecture, and all the cabins that it had for the creatures, and their seuerall prouisions. Io. Goropius discourseth likewise hereof, and at large, in the second booke of his Antiquities, entitled Gigantomachia; inserting also some part of Buteo. But, to speake plainly, if we take the cubit in common signification, for a foot and a halfe, and confider the different syze of men of that age from ours, together with the length, bredth and height of the Arke, and three stages (whereof the lowest was for the prouision, the next for the foure-footed and creeping creatures, and the vppermost for the birds, with Noe and his familie) and ouer all these a couering; wee shall finde roome enough to lodge and place all, according to the number in generall set downe by Moses, to wit, male and female of euery sort vncleane; and seauen of the cleane, male and female. The Poet here speaking of the Geometricall cubit, means a cubit solid, that is, in length, bredth and height taken together. There are that make the cubit two foot long; and make difference betwixt the cubit legale (as they call it) and the cubit of a man: glancing at that which is said (Deut. 3.) of the bed of Og king of Basan. Looke what Arias Montanus saith in his Tubal Cain and Noah; where he discourses of the measures and Architectures mentioned in holy Scripture, and of the Arke. These bookes are in the Volume which he calleth Apparatus, ioyned to the great Bibles in Hebrue, Greeke and Latine, and printed at Antwerpe. That which hath led these Atheists and profane wretches into errour, is, that they consider not that Noe, and the men of that Age, by reason of their higher stature, had longer cubits; and hard it is to giue a iust proportion of theirs vnto ours. When Moses wrote, certaine it is, that mens bodies were abated of their bignesse; yet that which he wrote was easily vnderstood of the Israelites, who receiued these things by tradition, and knew them as perfectly, as if they saw them with their eyes. The last argument here vsed by the Poet, adoring the wisdome of Almighty God, who made all things in number, weight and measure, is a reason of all reasons; and altogether vnreasonable are they that reason to the contrary: then beside reason were it, to propound reason to them that haue lost the true vse of reason, and will conceiue nothing, but that which their owne mad and extrauagant reason soundeth in their eares. But againe to the Text.
16. O father, o king of winds. Moses saith (Gen. 8.15.) that God spake vnto Noe, after that he had beene shut vp in the A [...]ke a yeere and some daies, and bade him come forth with his familie and the beasts; and gaue them all a blessing, which continues vnto this day. The Patriarke obeying the commandement, built an Altar vnto the Lord, and tooke of all the cleane foure-footed, and of all the cleane birds (hauing learned this difference in the holy schoole of his forefathers, who were taught it from God) and offred thereon whole burnt Sacrifices, in repentance and faith apprehending the [Page 31] Messias and Redeemer to come. For Sacrifices were vnto the faithfull as visible witnesses of their miserable estate in Adam, and Grace offred them in their Sauiour, applied with the eyes and hands of a liuely faith. Out of doubt these holy ceremonies were accompanied with most carnest prayers also: because true faith in a heart enflamed with the loue of God, could not be idle; He beleeued, and beleeuing spake, as did the Psalmist, Psal. 116. This prayer of Noe, supposed by the Poet, is fitted vnto the consideration of time past and to come, and founded vpon the text of Moses.
17. Goe breed. The rest of this booke containes a short exposition of the chiefe points handled in the ninth chap. of Gen. Whereof the first shewes the blessing of God, that would haue Noe and his children with the rest, increase and multiply, and replenish the earth. For the world, now as it were created anew, had need be sanctified and quickned from God with a new blessing. The second point is, that all creatures should be subiect vnto man: which we finde true at this day; as well by the inuentions we haue to master them all; and skill to draw food, seruice, profit and pleasure many wayes from them; as also by this, that the fiercest of them doe vs but seldome hurt, though easily they might destroy vs, if that word of God (The feare of you be vpon all the beasts of the earth) were not verified, and cast, as it were, a bridle into the iawes, and shackle to the pawes of enemies armed with so much aduantage against our kinde. The third, that Noe and his haue leaue giuen them, as freely to make vse of the beasts, as of any fruit growing vpon the Earth; so that they eat not the flesh with the blood for God would by this restraint shew how abominable murder is in his sight: whereof, as the fourth point, there is mention made expresly in the text. [Page 33] And lastly, to comfort Noe and his, the Lord tells them, and sweares thereto, that the world should neuer more be destroyed by a generall Flood; and further to assure them hereof, saith; This is the token of the couenant, which I make betweene me and you, and betweene euery liuing thing that is with you for euer: I will set my Bow in the cloud, &c. Gen 9.12. &c.
18. Then Noe cast-vp eye. To this elegant description of the Rainebow, nothing can be added It appeared certainly before the Flood; but then was it not a token of Gods couenant with mankind (as now it began to be) that the world should be no more destroyed by waters. That our Poet so playes the Philosopher vpon the colours of blew and red; hee takes it of some ancient Fathers of the Church; and it is no wayes impertinent or absurd. But the Reader is at liberty, to settle his iudgument on that hee shall thinke more conuenient. Such Allegories and Poeticall licence, haue their grace and good vse, when a man propounds them with modestie (as doth our Poet) not importuning any to receiue them; but leauing all men their iudgement free.
19. All holy Rites performed. The Scripture saith (Gen. 9.20.) that Noe was an Husbandman, and planted a vineyard. Hereby appeares that he, before the Flood, had betooke himselfe to the vocation of planting and tilling, with all that belonged thereto. A trade worthy such holy Fathers, and well beseeming their long liues. For then, and a long time after, was this exercise (by good right) held a lawfull vsurie, a gaine void of Enuie, an Art maintaining all Arts, and the true meanes of long liuing. In the meane time, while the posteritie of Seth followed husbandry and tillage, they of Cain gaue themselues wholly to high matters of State and gouernment in the world; whereby they came short of health, and true wisdome. Furthermore it is said, that Noe planted a vine, which was it may be a thing knowne of him before, but neuer dressed to the full proofe, till then; as may be gathered by that which the historie shewes fell out thereupon; to wit, that Noe drunke of the wine, and was drunken, and was vncoured in the mids of his tabernacle. For likely it is that if wine had beene vsed before the Deluge, [Page 36] drunkennesse in those dayes would haue shewed it selfe among other vices, and increased them: so as Noe might thereby haue taken occasion, after the Deluge, to beware thereof and stand the more vpon his guard But these words (he dranke of the wine) seeme to import that before then he neuer had tasted the sweetnesse of this fruit, and was taken therewith at vnawares. Some are of opinion, that it pleased the diuine goodnesse, because the strength of mans nature was impaired by the Flood, to helpe and recompence him with eating of flesh and drinking of wine; as meat and drinke more strong, and remedies auaileable, against the assaults of diuers diseases and infirmities, then like to ensue. For well may it be thought, by the curse of God, now redoubled vpon mankind, that the earth lost a good part of the force and vigour it had before; and that the Deluge was (as it were) a strong buck-water, to fret and diminish the force of all creatures, especially the body of man, which after the Flood waxed more feeble, and of lesse continuance then before: and for this cause it pleased God to comfort [Page 37] our poore and weake Nature, with drinke more vigorous and meat more solide. And for the places and countries destitute of wine, he hath furnished them with corne and fruit fit to make (for their comfort, strength and batling) drinke of such force and strength, as will make them drunke, if they take too much of it. The Poet hath hereto fitly adioyned the description of a place fit for a Vineyard; and the manner of dressing it. Whereof looke what Plinie saith in his 17. booke, chap. 21. & 22. and Ch. Stephen at the chapter of the Vine in his Country Farme.
20. Now Noah waxing old. Some thinke that Ianus, whom the writers of old time haue made so famous, was the Patriarke Noe, and that they gaue him that name of Ianus, for the inuention of wine, called by the Hebrewes Iasin: but others hold that Ianus came of Iauan (the sonne of Iaphet, Gen. 10.) of whom descended the Greeks and Latines. Moreouer, they paint this Ianus with two faces, one before and another behind; to shew his wisdome; or rather to signifie, that he saw both the world that was before the Flood, and that which came after. All this, in processe of time hath beene dawbed vp with strange fables; as appeares by the writings of the Gentiles. That which the Poet here saith this one fit of Noes drunkennesse, is touched and couched in a word by Moses, Gen. 9.21. but our Author hath amplified it very artificially; describing in right kind a man, no man, when he is ouercharged with wine: of purpose to make vs abhorre and detest that vice, which ouerthrew the ancient Greeks & Romans; though since their time it is growne a custome, & (as may seeme by the strange debauchment and outrage of our dayes) now taken for a vertue. Among the works of S. Basil, that ancient Greeke Bishop, there is an Homilie against drunkennesse, and the strange behauiour of a drunkard; right so set downe in all points, as liere by the Poet. That which is reported of Caesar, that dying he couered himselfe with his garment, when Brutus, with the rest of that conspiracie, killed him in open Senate; is written by Plutarch in his liues. The drunken man neuer thinks of his shame, as Caesar did; for, during the fit, his reason is gone; which proues that a fit of drunkennesse is much more dangerous then death it selfe: what's then the habit, and continuall custome thereof; besides the daily and great offence giuen by these men, no men, to God and his Church? The comparisons here vsed, to shew the nature of a slanderer (taken from Plutarchs flatterer, &c.) are so fitly applied by the Poet to his purpose, that they need no further exposition.
21. Come (brothers) come. Moses saith (Gen. 9.22.) that Cham the father of Chanaan saw the nakednesse of his father, lying drunke in the tent (as ver. 21.) and told his two brethren without, and Sem and Iaphet tooke a garment, and laid it vpon their shoulders, and went backward and couered the nakednesse of their father; and their faces were fromward, and they saw not their fathers nakednesse. And this is the point which the Poet handles in this section.
22. Slept out the surfet was. It is recorded in the foresaid chapter also, that Noe awoke from his wine, end knew what his younger sonne had done vnto [Page 38] him; he knew it either by some part of his memory confusedly retained in drunkennesse, or by renelation from God; except we should thinke rather that Sem and Iaphet told him; that he might reproue the foule impietie of their brother: and he is noted the younger, for aggrauation of the crime. Whereupon the Father said: Cursed be Canaan, a seruant of seruants shall he be to his brethren: and againe, Blessed be the Lord God of Sem, and Canaan shall be his seruant: God shall enlarge Iaphet, and he shall dwell in the tents of Sem, and Canaan shall be his seruant. The Diuines propound here many questions to be considered; whereof these two are the chiefe.
- 1. Why Noe went here so far as to denounce that curse against his grandchild Canaan and that race.
- 2. What is the meaning of these blessings vpon Sem and Iaphet. The Poet answers in a word, that Noe pronounced these curses and blessings by spirit of prophecie.
Forasmuch as God, in his infinite wisdome, when he had before humbled his poore seruant Noe, was pleased now to arme him againe with fatherly authoritie; wherewith hee might pronounce the iust and alway venerable sentences of his eternall decree. For in few words here haue we the state of the world and Gods Church, set downe by this great Patriarke; who could not haue spoken those things (so after verified in destruction of the Canaanites, and Gods extraordinarie fauour to the Israelites, and faithfull Gentiles) but by the Holy Ghost, to whom is alway present, euen that which is to come. For the rest, Moses compriseth all (after his manner) briefely; but with words so liuely and significant, as are easie to be vnderstood of all that weigh and reade them with reuerence and humilitie, and take helpe of the good Commentaries of Fathers both old and new.
23. O soule vice. He detesteth in most proper termes, and grauely inueigheth against drunkennesse, saying, that though it did no more hurt in the world, then impeach the reputation of this Patriarke, otherwise an example of vertue; it were to be hated aboue death. And further, in very few lines he presseth together what the ancient Authors, both holy and profane, haue said against drunkennesse. There are certaine eminent places of holy Scripture, which I need but quote vnto the Reader. See Prou. 20.1. & 21.17. & 23.20.29.30. &c. & 31.4. Esay 5.11. & 22. & 28.1. Hosea 4.11. Luk. 21.34. Rom. 13.13. & 1 Cor. 6.10. Gal. 5.21. Ephes. 5.18. Among the ancient Fathers, S. Chrysostome and S. Basil haue in diuers their Homilies very graue and expresly condemned this vice. And there is a whole Homilie against it in the first Tome of S. Basil, and the 80. of the fourth Tome of S. Chrysostome, vpon those words of S. Paul to Timothie, Modico vino vtere. See also what S. Austen writeth hereof to the holy Virgins, and in his fift booke vpon Gen. where he speaks of Lot. And what S. Ierome hath to Oceanus and Eustochium, vpon the first to Tim. the third chap. and to Titus. Among the works of the Heathen, the 84. Epistle of Seneca is worthy to be read. The Greeke and Latine Poets haue also infinite inuectiues against this vice, so beastly, nay condemned euen by nature it selfe in beasts. As for the examples here alledged by the Poet, of Clytus and [Page 39] Pentheus, see Plutarch in the life of Alexander the Great, and Ouid in his third booke of Metamorphosis, toward the end: and apparent examples hath the holy Scripture of mischiefe ensuing vpon this wine-bibbing; [Page 39] Not, Lot, Nabal, Ammon, Ela, Balthasar, and others. But the Histories of our time haue a thousand times worse, and more tragicall; which our after-beers will detest and wonder at.
BABILONE. The second Booke of Noe, called BABILON.
1. Prince. Here is the liuely image of a good Prince set downe vnto vs in a few lines, borrowed of many good Authors both diuine and humane, that teach in their writings rules and examples notable for this purpose. Moses in the Law, Dauid in the 101. Psalme, doe declare vnto vs, the rules of dutie belonging vnto Gouernours: and they themselues, with all those the good Iudges and Kings that were among the people of God, serue for sure patterns and examples to all such as meane faithfully to discharge the like duties. Also Plato, Aristotle, Xenophon, and Plutarch, with diuers others, for the instruction of those that came after them, haue set forth many godly precepts and examples. The commodities that arise out of euery one of these vertues here described (each one whereof requireth a large Commentarie) are infinite: and where there are now adaies such Princes in the world, their subiects may thinke themselues exceeding happy. For next after the sincere knowledge and worship of the true God, there is no greater happinesse in the world for vs to enioy, than to be gouerned by such vertuous personages as are here described: marke then the perfect image of the good Prince.
2. Tyrant. To giue the better glosse to the former picture, another cleane contrary, and maruellous fearefull to behold, he setteth here before our eyes; the picture of a Tyrant that liueth in mistrust of the whole world, as did Dionysius the elder tyrant of Sicilie, of whom we reade among the liues of Platarch. He was so mistrustfull, that for feare of his Barbers, he made his daughters bring him a burning cole to sindge his haire withall. More than this, a Tyrant defileth himselfe with incests, whoredomes, adulteries, and the sinne of Sodom, and therewith infecteth his whole Court and Country: as that filthy Nero did, whose life is written by Suetonius, Tacitus, and others, reciting therein many horrible and shamefull cases. Againe, the Tyrant will be subiect vnto no law, nor order whatsoeuer; he ouerthroweth the ground lawes and pillars of the state: or if he seeme willing to submit himselfe thereunto, it is to further himselfe so much the more in the vndermining, by diuers hid practises, and destroying all such as might any way resist, or make head against him. Hence commeth it to passe, that he may in no wise abide any inquisition or examination to be [Page 41] made of his vnworthy and vile outrages, but vaunteth of the iniurie that priuate men suffer, and discredit they are driuen vnto by meanes of his oppression. To maintaine his state the better, he entertaineth and vpholdeth all manner of hurlyburlies, factions, quariels, and ciuill wars: he fauoureth ruffians, bawds, slatterers, lyers, light and loose persons, murderers, impoysoners, Epicures, Atheists, and such as are defiled with all manner of vice and wickednesse. He promiseth mountaines, performeth nothing: glorieth to breake oath and promise, and to deceiue and surprise both small and great by faire words, sweet speech, humble and courteous countenance, when his heart imagineth villanie and treason to his country. He neuer forbeareth any thing, he neuer pardoneth any man, nourisheth and fatteth himselfe with blood and fire: all peaceable and vertuous persons he disgraceth and ouerthroweth, supporting and aduancing all peace-breakers, robbers, and wicked liuers: he taketh bribes for all offices, and oppresseth the people with the vnbrideled number of catchpole-officers, that maintaine themselues only by grating vpon others: his subiects he would haue liue all dayes of their life in ignorance: painfull, wise and learned men, and those that haue well to take vnto, because they need the lesse to depend on him, or else sell themselues for his fauour, he chaseth far from him, and maketh beholding vnto him, none but fooles, idiots, iesters, anticks, wranglers, and such copes-mates as of naught worth are suddenly start vp, that wholly depend vpon him, and reuell in his cofers, not giuing him (as they cannot) any good counsell for the commonwealth; they care not which end thereof goe forward: but all their care and counsell is for their priuate gaine, which serues to no better vse, than to intice and draw them on daily to carelesse and wicked liuing. Further yet, so far is he from regarding or placing neere about him men of worth and good qualities, that on the contrary, to the imitation of Tarquinius surnamed the proud (whose storie Liuie writeth in the first booke of his second Decade, concerning the Poppie heads he broke downe with his staffe, to teach his sonne by a dumbe shew, that he should rid out of the way all the Peeres of the Citie, and forsake (as another saith) fifty frogs to catch one Sammon) he breaketh downe the highest cares of corne: [Page 42] that is, he causeth all those to be put to death, that might any wayes hinder his wicked intents. What should I say more? Such a cursed creature, without God, without conscience, worse than any wilde beast, spareth neither kith nor kin, but either by sword or poyson maketh away the very neerest of all his blood, that he may raigne alone, if it were possible. But notwithstanding the many bands of his guard, he standeth in feare of euery man, and is despised, mocked, and detested of all. For why? Besides [Page 43] that is aforesaid, he glorieth and taketh delight to deuise new subsidies, imposts, and tributes, whereby the comminaltie may be impouerished, and held in bondage, and so in steed of Homers people-feeder, he becommeth a people-eater. Of this image of a tyrant, there are examples aboue number found, both in ancient and late writers of Church histories, and others: So I returne to the Poet.
3. Scarce is. The posteritie of Noe being much increased, as Moses reckoneth in the 10. chapter of Genesis, they began to spread abroad and take seuerall habitations, but not far one from another so soone after the Flood. Among other the sonnes of Cham, is numbred Cus the father of Nimrod, of whom the historie maketh mention, that he began to be great on the earth, and was a mighty hunter before the Almighty, and that the beginning of his raigne was Babel, Erech, Archad, and Calnch, in the land of Sennaar. Vpon this place are giuen two diuers expositions: The first is, of some that hold that Nimred was the first after the Flood that gaue any meet forme of publike gouernment, and by the consent of many families, considering his wisdome and valour, was accepted for master and gouernour, to rule and order many housholds together: by reason whereof (say they) he is called a strong hunter before the Lord: and namely, for that he repressed, by maine force, the wicked and vnruly, who, like sauage beasts, preied vpon the life of man. But the greater part [Page 44] of Expositors take this otherwise, and hold, that Nimrod by force and diuers subtleties (here finely set downe by the Poet) got the supremacie; and that this power ascribed vnto him, was not truly Roy all lawfull, but a power vsurped by force, a hunters power, where with he surprised men, and raigning ouer them cruelly, handled them as if they were beasts, and that before the Lord, which is as much to say, as in despite of God, who had established a gentle rule and gouernment among the families. This second exposition is the more certaine; whether we consider the race of Nimrod, or the proper meaning and sequele of the words of the text, or the buildings of Nimrod, or what successe his proud attempt had. The Poet relying on this opinion, hath further followed in the description of the youth, and exercises of this first Tyrant that was in the second world, such things as were likely to be, and that with such a grace, as in a discourse is requisite, that out of the holy Scripture hath so narrow foundation, and in other bookes is, with many fables and names vncertaine, darkned.
4. Now he enthroned is. This is the exposition of the words, mightie hunter before the Lord: to wit, that Nimred, Chams nephew, did proudly lift himselfe vp against God and man. His buildings, and the beginning of his raigne could not haue beene such, without offering violence to the peace and libertie of diuers families ouer whom hee bare rule: and there is no shew to the contrary, but that by diuers practises from time to time he got the Soueraigntie. The holy Scripture oftentimes by the names of hunters and chasers, meaneth God, enemies, and the persecutours of his Church, Psa' 91. & 124. Ezech. 32. Lament. 3. The seuentie Interpreters translate the Hebrue text after this manner: This Nimrod began to be a Giant on the earth, and a huntesman, or leader of hounds before the Lord God. By the hounds of Nimrod may be vnderstood his guards, and the fauourers of his tyrannie. Moses called him [...] Gi [...]or isaid, that is, Iustie, strong, or great and mightie chaser. Which noteth not only the stature and height of bodie, but also might and authoritie ioyned with violence, in all those that want the feare of God. Now although Moses in the cleuenth Chapter of Genesis, where he speaketh of the Citie and Tower of Babel, make no mention of Nimrod, yet hath the Poet aptly gathered out of the Chapter aforegoing, that Nimrod was the author and promoter of [Page 48] those buildings; in as much as Babel is called the beginning of his raigne, who could not any waies raigne without some habitations for himselfe and his subiects, and considering that Moses in the selfe-same place affirm [...]th, that the Cities founded by Nimrod, were in the countrey of Sennaar, and that in the 12. verse of the 11. Chapter he saith, that these builders of Babel dwelt on a plaine in the countrey of Sennaar: by good reason the inuention and beginning thereof is here ascribed to Nimrod, who by this meanes sought to set his state on foot. Also this Monarchie of Babylon, was one of the first, and with it that of Niniuie, as may be gathered out of the words of Moses. But the more particular discourse of these matters, and diuers other questions concerning Nimrod and his outrages, require a larger commentatie.
5. Like as the Vulcan weake. The Poet saith, that as a small deale of fire let fall by some Shepherds among the drie leaues of a great Forrest, setting it selfe, and hatching (as it were) the heat a while, at length with helpe of the wind, groweth to so great a flame, that it taketh the whole Forrest, and leaueth not a Driad, that is, not a tree in his proper or naturall barke: So the words first vttered by Nimrod, then blowne with the bellowes of his Minions and fauourites set the hearts of the people on fire, that he soone [Page 49] obtained his purpose. This is it that Moses noteth in the eleuenth Chapter of Genesis, the third and fourth verses, They said one to another (the chiefe men hauing put it in their heads) Come, let vs make bricke, and burne in well in the fire: so had they bricke in stead of stone, and s [...]me had they in stead of morter. Then said they, Goe, let vs build vs a Citie, and a Tower, whose top may reach vnto the heauens, that we may get vs a name, lest we be scattered vpon the whole earth. The Poet in his verse discourseth vpon this deuise. It is thought that this proud building was begun about an hundred and fiftie yeares after the Floud. The good Patriarch Noe, that liued yet long time after, saw his posteritie confounded and scattered: for so it was the Lords will to exercise the patient faith of his seruant, to whom in recompence he shewed the effect of his blessings in the family of Sem, where still remained the Hebrew tongue, together with the doctrine and discipline of the true Church. Now out of this history of Moses touching the building of the Towne, and the confusion of the builders, is sprong (as it seemeth) the fabulous discourse of the Poets, set downe by Ouid in his first booke of Metamorphosis, touching the Giants that heaped hilles one vpon another to scale heauen, and dispossesse Iupiter of his throne. Thus hath Satan endeuoured to falsifie the truth of sacred historie. Well, this arrogant building sheweth vs how vaine are the imaginations of worldly men; namely, to set at naught the true renowne of heauenly life, and seeke after the false of earth. Carnall men haue no care at all to worship and reuerence the name of the true God, they regard only to be accounted-of themselues, and so to write their names in the dust. Against the attempts of the men of Babel, and all their successours, let vs oppose these sentences, the 18. and 21. of Prouerbs. The name of the Lord is a strong tower, thither shall the iust repaire and be exalted. There is no wisdome, nor vnderstanding, nor force, can preuaile against the Lord: and that which is written Psal. the 127. Except the Lord doe build the house, the builders labour but in vaine.
6. God seeing this: Moses in the 5. and 6. verses of the 11. chapter saith: Then the Lord came downe to see the Citie, and Towre, which the sonnes of men had built. And the Lord said, Behold the people is one, and they all haue one language, and this they begin to doe, neither can they now bee stopped from whatsoeuer they haue imagined to doe: come on, let vs goe downe and there confound their language, that they vnderstand not one another. Then he addeth the execution of the sentence, saying; So the Lord scattered them from thence vpon all the earth, and they left off to build the Citie. Therefore the name of it was called Babel, because the Lord did there confound the language of all the earth, and scattered them from thence ouer all the world. God, that is all in all, neuer changeth his place, he goeth neither vpward nor downward, but the Scripture saith, hee goeth downe then when he worketh any thing on earth, which falling out beyond and against the ordinary course of nature, witnesseth his particular presence. Vnder these few words of Moses, a many things are to be considered: chiefly, he noteth the great sinnes of the builders, in that he bringeth in the Lord, iudge of the whole world, vouchsafing to bow downe his eyes particularly vpon [Page 50] that foolish people. For it is not without cause that the great God of heauen and earth should arise from his throne, and (if I durst so say) leaue the palace of his glory to come and view these durt-dawbers or morter-makers By this manner of speech Moses sheweth, and giueth vs to vnderstand, that, long time before, these Babylonians had built in their hearts most wonderfull high and stately towers, and that long agoe they had bak'd in the sire of their concupiscence some maruellous brickes: to wit, they had much counsailed one with another, and discoursed of meanes to get renowme, and found no better way to attaine their purpose, then to raise a tower vp to the heauens, to rauish with astonishment all those that should behold it. So Moses saith that this pride and froward selfe trust deserued a grieuous punishment: but as God is perfectly iust, so layeth he vpon the builders a chastisement proportionable vnto their offence.
7. Thus had he said and straight. In God it is all one to will and to doe: And further he sendeth not lightning, winde, nor tempest against the tower: but contenteth himselfe to strike the proud and puffed-vp braines of the builders: and so the building founded vpon their folly was ouerthrowne by their foolish iangling that God mingled with their language; and the vainglorious masons insteed of their imagined renowne, haue gotten themselues euerlasting shame. Who would haue thought that God had had so ready such kinde of rods to punish mankinde withall? But let the Reader consider whether the world at this day be not full of Babel-towers. Marke what a number of men doe in euery kinde of vocation. Sith I doe not take vpon mee but to write bare Annotations, I leaue it to the Readers consideration, who may see, now more then euer, that the world continueth the building of Babel: that is, men madly gainset their owne wisedome and power against the wisedome and power of God; who treading as it were with woollen feet, and stealing on softly, is able with an arme of Iron to surprise and seize vpon these builders, and turne by diuers meanes their vaine purposes and weake endeuours to naught. The Poet hath vsed many very sit comparisons to represent the confusion of these workmen. The first is taken from that which wo see fall out in a great rabblement of Pesants, ouerruled by the Launce or Mace of Bacchus: that is, such as haue the wine in their heads, and are drunken: for among such people is commonly heard a strange confused noise and iangling, as the Church-ales and Wakes, and other such passe-times doe now and then declare. The second is taken from the chirping of Birds, in voice and song diuers. The third from Masons, constrained by the sodaine rage of a land-flood, to leaue off the begun worke of a Bridge. And here is a liuely description of Gods iudgements, together with their degrees and consequences: namely, in the confusion of vnderstanding first, then of speech, and lastly of the whole company; which being vnable longer to continue, was quickly so scattered, that (as Moses saith) they ceased to build the Citie.
8. O proud rebellion. A fine description of euils ensuing this confusion of speech. First, the acquaintance of all mankinde together, the knot and loue-bond of Nations, is so loosened and broke, that scarse is there found any remedy for it, some of them not thinking on, or not at all ca [...]ng for others. Secondly, that onely one language which decked and imbellished the acquaintance and fellowship of men, that kept them in peace and temper, such as it was, that made them all well appaid, that moued each one to his dutie, and was much regarded of all, hath lost all this by this change; and in a word, hath neither shew, nor grace of a language: insomuch, as euen at this day the fall of the Tower of Babel is heard from North to South, from East to West. That is to say, in the diuerse languages of so many Nations, we may obserue almost nothing else but a kinde of chattering and confused sound, neither fit, nor comely, nor expressing at all the nature of things: At least one people so iudgeth of anothers tongue. For I pray you what pleasure taketh a Frenchman to heare a Moscouite or a Mexican speake? And euen the tongues that we vnderstand, and speake (as we thinke) reasonable well, what are they vnto vs in respect of our mother tongue, or the principall tongues? Thirdly, whereas the Nations dwelling farthest asunder, might easily haue come together, beene acquainted, and trafficked one with another: Now a man is no sooner gone out of his owne doores, but hee hath much [...]dooe to vnderstand those that he meeteth withall; and if he set foot in any farre countrey, hee needeth interpretouts, or must haue spent a long time before to learne the tongue, or else must speake by signes, or alwayes [Page 53] hold his peace, and liue like a dumbe creature. Fourthly, to amplifie further this miserie, the Poet sheweth that if this disorder had not happened, a man might haue learned in short time all the Liberall sciences, and gained the top of that hill where Encyclopaedia, (that is, the full compasse of all Arts) crowneth all such lawfull aspiring mindes: and in a word, obtained the perfect knowledge of all things; whereas now we spend our whole life in the learning words of the Hebrew, Greeke, and Latine tongues, and that is nothing else but babling: and in stead of being well seene in the heauenly Philosophie, and that of this lower world, wee must take paines in syllables and words, circuits of speech, and other like exercises, vntill we be gray-headed and white-bearded, and so end our liues scarse hauing yet attained any sufficient knowledge of Law, Physicke or Diuinitie, that are the chiefe professions. The learned know how hard a matter it is to haue a good stile, which is called [...], the measure of learning; and that Aristotle, who hath so excellently well set it downe, in that wonderfull worke of his, commonly called the Organ, is vnderstood but of a few. What may a man say then of the most part of the discourses and speech of men now adayes liuing? It is nothing but babble, it is Babel it selfe. I speake not here of the substance of things, but of the fashion, order, and manner that is vsed to make them bee conceiued of those to whom wee speake, be they neuer so cunning in the tongue themselues. Then of Barbarisme and ignorance, what shall a man thinke?
9. What shall I tell you more? Moses saith, in the beginning of the eleuenth Chapter, that then (that is, many yeares after the Floud, and about the same time when Chams posteritie left the East parts to come and dwell in the plaine of Sennaar) the whole earth was one language and one speech, to wit, Noe and his children: and all the families from them issued, though they dwelt not together, yet spake they all the same language. All of them parted not from the East to the foresaid plaine of Sennaar: but likely enough is their opinion, that hold that Noe and Sem parted not so soone so farre a sunder, and especially that they accompanied not these builders of Babel, who sought renowne, and set vp their rest in this world. A man [Page 56] may aske now what was that only language they spoke in the world before the Floud, and after, vntill the building of Babel. The Poet answereth, it was the language of God himselfe. Hereupon ariseth two opinions: The first is, of those that to honour their countrey, after the example of some ancient Heathens, would make vs beleeue they are sprung of the earth, or fallen from the Moone, and thinke their speech the most excellent of all other. The Aegyptians and Phrygians haue long sithence debated this matter, as shall be said more at large in the next Section. A few yeares agoe a Physitian of Brabant named I. Goropius, set forth a great booke entituled Origines Antuerpiana, wherein he aimeth especially at this marke, to proue [Page 57] the Cymbrike tongue (which in his opinion is the base Almaine) to be the first speech of the world. Since his death a certain writer of Liege, hath set forth many other books of his about the same matter: and in one of them, that is called Hermathena, this Cymbrike tongue or low Dutch, is preferred far aboue the Roman, Greek & Hebrue. It asketh a long discourse to answer his Reasons: for this time I will answer but in a word: Namely, that all that which he alledgeth for the preheminence of his owne tongue, is a meere cauill, that is called in the Schooles, Petitio principij: when a Sophister taketh for granted that which is expresly denied him, and hee knowes not how to proue. Goropius groundeth all his discourse on this: that the Cymbrike tongue hath borrowed nothing of any other, and that the Hebrue is comen of it, and euen borroweth of the Cymbricke. This a man will denie Goropius and his disciples: and whereas they shew some Hebrue words or Phrases that resemble the words and termes of the base Almaine, and so conclude that Adam spake low Dutch, and that the language of Moses and the Prophets is hard, ambiguous, poore, and borrowed of the Cymbricke, which they were not well able to follow: I answer, that they are deceiued, and that on the contrary they ought to say, the Hebrue was before all other tongues; who were begun in Babel, and haue sithence brought forth infinite others, as the high and low Dutch, and other like, now vsed in the world. I would the learned professors of principall tongues would find some time to refute the allegations of Goropius: Especially those that make against the Hebrue, which he hath too saucil [...]e disgraced in the second booke of his Hermath, Pag. 25.26. &c. The second opinion, which I hold with the Poet, is, that the Hebrue tongue, inclosed chiefly in the Canonicall bookes of the old Testament (which haue beene wonderfully preserued vntill our time) is the first speech of the world, and the same that Moses meant, when he said, The whole earth had one mouth or language, before the building of Babel. The reasons therof are touched in a word by the Poet, who doth hereafter treat of them more at large, as wee haue also noted in the margent, and meane to speake somewhat thereof in the 12. Annotation. Now whereas this first language hath at this day no letter nor word, but is full of maimes and miseries, it may be said of euery tongue since the confusion: that it is nothing but corrupt [...]angling, weake, vncertaine, and changing euer from time to time, as many haue already shewed heretofore. The Greeke and Latine tongues haue changed fiue or sixe times: and the learned know what wrangling there hath beene about the writing, pronouncing, and disposing of their termes and phrases. Then what is to be said of the Greekish and Latinish tongues, those that are but apes of the other? What of the barbarous, strange, and new tongues? Or of those whose foolish pronunciation only no man can abide, or of others that by vse, time, and force of people, are waxen current? But this I leaue to such as list to Comment hereupon at large.
10. Long since the Phrygians. The Egyptians, being euer great braggers, vaunted long agoe that they were the most ancient people of the world: a certaine King of theirs named Psammetichus, attempted to search out the [Page 58] truth; and for that end thought meet by some meanes to discouer what was the first language of the world: Thus, he tooke two new-borne babes, and deliuered them vnto shepheards to be nourished, commanding they should be brought vp in a secret staule, there to sucke the milke of Goats, and straitly forbidding, that none should come there to pronounce any word before them: then after a certaine time when they were of age, they should be left alone, and made to fast a while. Now so soone as they were past three years old, their gouernour hauing in all points accomplished the Kings commandement, came to open the staule, and then the two children began to crie Bec, bec: the shepheard said not a word: they repeat still the words: and he let his Master vnderstand thereof, who caused the children to be brought secretly vnto him, and heard them speake. So when the meaning of the word was asked, and the Egyptians vnderstood it signified bread in the Phrygian tongue, they granted the preheminence of antiquitie vnto the Phrygians. Herodotus writeth that the Priests of Vulcan, in the Citie of Memphis, told him the same tale. There are some others that thinke these Babes were brought vp of dumbe nurses: howsoeuer it be, sure it is that the pride of the Egyptians was by some such deuise daunted. Suidas, touching the very point, saith that babes nourished of a Goat, must needs crie somewhat like a Goat, and such was the sound of the word Bec; a meet reward for his wisdome that made such a triall. The Grecians in old time were wont to call an old dotard [...], a word composed of Bec and [...], the Moone: the same is turned into a prouerbe which Erasinus expoundeth. But Goropius in the fifth and ninth booke of his Origines playeth the subtill Sophister, as his manner is, and vseth his beake vpon the word Bec: concluding, since Bec in low Dutch signifies bread, and Psammetichus his babes called for Bec, that so long agoe they spoke low Dutch; whereupon it followeth, that his tongue was the most ancient of the world. He calleth also his discourses vpon the same Bocceselanea, offering the subiect of a Comedie to some new Aristophanes. But let vs consider the answers of the Poet to the Phrygians, and to Goropius.
11. O fooles, that little thought. The first answer is, that this word, Bec, that the children spoke, was a confused found comming neare the crie of Goats: And how could they aske bread, seeing that they vnderstood it not, neuer heard it spoken by any body, neuer heard the meaning of it? The second is, that words are not borne with vs, but that we learne them by haunt and long vsage. If they were borne with vs, doubtlesse these infants would haue spoken as well other words: for the vnderstanding being moued, the belly pinched with hunger, would not content it selfe to expresse his passion in one syllable. The third is, that men are onely the right and proper speakers, yet if they be not taught it, and thereto fashioned, but are brought vp among beasts, in stead of a right and framed speech, they shall make but a sound and crie confused like vnto beasts. In a word, [...] take this discourse of Herodotus, touching the two infants and their Bec, to be but a tale made vpon pleasure, and a very heard-say; and there-against I oppose the antiquitie of the Hebrue tongue. Yet if I were bound to beleeue Herodotus, I would say the Phrygians Bec was drawne from the Hebrues [...] Lechem. The disciples of Goropius will confesse that the Phrygians are come from the successours of Noe: so can it not seeme strange vnto them, that I say the Phrygians retaining some tokens of their grandfathers language, haue (like infinite others) lengthned and shortned the most part of the words: some whereof yet remaine whole, to witnesse the antiquity and principalitie of the Hebrue tongue. After this the Poet answereth those that build vpon the vnframed noise of beasts, the chirping and chattering of birds, and the babling of Parrets, to proue the birth of speech with vs, and cast a cloud ouer that perfection he granted only to the first language; and so he saith that man only endued with reason, is the only creature on earth capable of distinct, ordered, important, and proper speech, and further speaketh many seuerall tongues: whereof he bringeth in for example the learned Scaliger. Hence it ensueth that a man cannot learne to speake, if he be brought vp among beasts that haue no reason whereby to deserue the name of a speech, or to vse the same aright: or if he be brought vp with such as are dombe, of whom he can learne nothing but signes and confused sounds, he will neuer speake treatably, nor vnderstand any thing, except another doe speake first vnto him, and make him vnderstand the speech with often repeating: As appeareth not onely in young children, but in the oldest men also, who learne as long as they liue the words and names of those very things which they haue oftentimes scene before. It followeth then, that all the discourse of the Phrygians Bec is a deuised tale, and therefore vnworthy for them to build vpon, that goe about to proue the Phrygian tongue, or theirs that would draw their pedegree from the Phrygians, to be the first language of the world. Another man may finde in his owne tongue a many like words, and draw thence as good conclusions as Goropius doth. But a strange thing it is, that the Heathen Authors haue faid nothing, nor made any mention in their bookes of the beginnings and occasions of diuersitie of tongues: especially that the Grecians, and other such learned people that haue professed the knowledge of all things, knew not the beginning of their owne language. Moses only hath set vs downe this notable history, and opened to the Heathen the spring of their tongues. And this further is to be wondered at in the Historie of Babel, that the Hebrue tongue alone, as being the first of the world, hath remained among that people that were the Church of God, where the Messias was borne, and from whence arose the preaching of the Gospell, touching the appearance of the promised Sauiour: which Gospell hath sithence by the gift of tongues, and ministerie of the Apostles, ouerspread all the parts of the world. Thus Moses handling the beginning of tongues, proueth his historie to haue long fore-gone all others, and therewithall engraueth vpon the gates and walls of the Citie and Tower of Babel, a goodly warning to all men, to flie and auoid Atheisme, and all vaine-glorious folly, which buildeth Towers against Heauen, and rebelleth against God: who suffereth the wicked to aduance and hoyse vp themselues the space of some few moneths or yeeres, to the end he may giue them a fearefull ouerthrow at length. What would the presumption of a man haue done (saith Saint Augustine) when algate the top of this Tower had raught vnto the clouds? It is humilitie that lifteth vp the heart on high, to the Lord, not against the Lord: she it is that leadeth vs the true, right, and sure way to heauen. These few words I thought good to adde vnto the rest, because the proud aspiring minde of man cannot be sufficiently discouered, nor too much cried out on. Whereas these builders busily forecast in their minde, and laboured to make themselues renowned among their posteritie, and thought men of some worth; let vs remember that the true praise consisteth not in workes of goodly outward shew, but in such as are good indeed, and approued of God. So let vs returne to the text of the Poet, who hauing touched in a word the beginning of tongues, and refuted some contrary objections, sheweth now which of all the tongues that haue beene, are, or shall be in the world; ought to be accounted the chiefe and most ancient, and whereof a man may truely say, it is the most excellent of all other.
12. The Hebrew tongue. He propoundeth fiue reasons, whereby he is induced to beleeue that the Hebrew is the first tongue of all, whatsoeuer the. Greeke and others doc alledge for themselues.
The first is, that this tongue compriseth much matter in few words, is very significant, briefly and plainly expresseth whatsoeuer a man can thinke, and when it is requisite to discouer the most secret and hidden plights of the heart, she slippeth none, but for all things hath words liuely, pleasant, waightie and of great import: and for her circuits of speech and long discourses, they are more wonderfull then the best and sweetest the Greeke hath: which notwithstanding her store of selfe-meaning words, her bould and far-fetcht Epithites, her cunning Metaphores, her words compounded, her tenses and other fine deuises, is no more comparable to the other, then the chirping of a Goldsinch is to the song of the Nightingall. Proofe hereof may bee made by the earnest and diligent consideration, and waying the words, sentences, and discourses of the Hebrew with those of the Greeke, and all others: not onely in Grammers and Dictionaries, but euen in whole bookes and volumes. It shall suffice me to wage and lay the booke of Psalmes onely, or the workes of Salomon, or Iob, or of Esay, against all other Authours: and I dare bouldly auouch, that in one of these a man shall finde almost in euery chapter, more elegance, state and maiestie, more figures, and more of all kinde of ornaments for a discourse, than in all the tedious workes of those that mans wisedome setteth-by so much. I speake not now of the matter and substance of things, which neuerthelesse is in this tongue as happily expressed as in any other; let them straine themselues neuer so much, they are not able but very grosly and a-farre-off to make a shew of that which this other painteth out in orient colours, what matter soeuer it hath occasion to vtter.
The second reason is, that the Rabbines or Hebrew Doctors (men wondrous carefull to preseiue the whole body of the old Testament, so as the least letter, point, and accent, they haue counted ouer and againe often times) haue noted in the 22. letters of the Hebrew Alphabet, either apart or together considered, all the secrets of diuinitie and of Philosophie, both naturall and morall. This is a notable thing in the Hebrew tongue, that all the letters haue their proper signification: and that the letters of most of the principall tongues in the world haue taken their beginning from them: as also that the primitiue words, and those of whom infinite others are deriued in diuers principall tongues, are drawne from the letters, syllables, and words of the Hebrew. To say nothing of the excellency of her accents, and the propertie of her vowels: the Rabbines haue further found out many secrets by diuers-way-turning and alter-placing the letters of Hebrew words: and that which the Greekes and others haue after their example inuented, is nothing in comparison. For there is scarce any word in the Hebrew, but being inuerted (as may easily be done, and sometimes two, three, or foure wayes, as the number of the letters are) offereth to our consideration another word, either of like sense, or contrary: or making relation to the first, giueth thereto such light, beautie & liuelihood, that it is wonderfull to behold. Againe, oftentimes a Nowne or other word, yea a letter, importeth a whole sentence, like vnto the Egyptians Hieroglyphikes, inuented of them to the imitation of the Hebrew letters and words, yet nothing in comparison of them. This matter would require a whole volumne, to be writting according to Art, by the hand of some one that were well seene in the tongues: and I could name three paire yet liuing that are well able to doe it. In the meane season, whosoeuer is desirous to search further herein, let him read the Harmonie of the World, written by Franciscus Georgius, and Guido Faber: the Heptap. of Ioannes Picus, Earle of Mirandola, the Hieroglyphickes of I. Goropius, from the beginning of the seuenth booke, to the end of the sixteenth: three bookes of I. Reuclinus De arte Cabalistica, and other three bookes of his De Verbo mirabil [...], the Cabala of Picus, with the interpretations of Angelus Burgoneuensis thereupon Further, much good matter to this purpose a man may finde in Thesauro linguae sanctae, set out by S. Pagninus, & after augmented by many other learned professours of this tongue. See further the Syriac Institut, &c. of Camnius: the Mithridates of C. G [...]snerus: the Alphabet in 12. tongues of Postella, and his booke. De ant quitate linguae Hebraicae, there are many such Treatises set forth by diuers learned men: whereout, and of the bookes aforenamed, may be gathered infinite proofes of that which the Poet hath touched in this second reason.
The third is, that there liues no Nation vnder the cope of heauen, but keepeth still some words of Hebrew in their speech; First, the Caldean, Syrian, Arabian, Egyptian, Persian, Ethiopian, and many other, as the Gotthicke, Troglodyticke, Punicke, are so deriued thence, that they come as neere it as Italian to Latine, some more, some lesse. Secondly, the Greeke, Latine, and those others, that are farthest off, haue yet here and there some words that we must needes grant are sprong from the same fountaine: a man may set downe a many of them, but it were too long here to coate the examples. Thirdly, the roots of many words that are taken to be Greeke or some other tongue, are found to be Hebrew, as Franciscus Iunius hath plainly shewed in his learned oration Deliuguae Hebraea antiquitate & praeslantia.
The fourth reason is, that the doctrine of the old Testament, which is the doctrine of the first and most ancient people of the world, was not written but in Hebrew. No man denieth that the people that came of Sem the sonne of Noe, is the most ancient: among these remained the Church of God and the Hebrew tongue. God spake not but in the Hebrew tongue by the high Priest that wore the sacred Ephod, and the breast-plate of iudgement, whereon was set [...] Vrim & Thummim (words signifying lights and perfections) which some thinke was the [...] or foure-letered name Iehoua, contained within the brest-plate: others say it was the rankes of those twelue precious stones there enchased, that on them had ingrauen the names of the twelue tribes of Israel: as if it were a repetition of that which Moses saith in the 17, 18, 19, and 20. verses of the 28. chapter of Exodus, where he speaketh of [...], Vrim & Thummim in the 30. verse: others hold they were certaine names: others are of diuers other opinions. Some late writers thinke those words were ingrauen in the breast-plate: This is a secret, the search whereof (whether one dispute of the words, or what they meant, or whats become of them, &c.) is very painfull and needlesse; for that now sithence the comming of Christ we ought to follow the truth it selfe, and not stay vpon shadowes. These words doubtlesse gaue to vnderstand, that all light and perfection commeth of our Sauiour, in whom all the fulnesse of the Godhead bodily dwelleth, in whom are hid all the treasures of vnderstanding & knowledge, who is the light of his Church, that is made vnto vs of God his father wisedome, iustice, redemption, and holinesse. In all iudgements, demands, oracles, and reuelations that were made by Vrim and Thummim (as may be gathered out of the 27. chapter of Numbers, the first booke of Samuel the 13. and 30. chapters, and other places where aduise and counsell was asked of God, and answere was made by the mouth of the high Priest, there appeared a cleere light, a sure truth and perfection: all which in Christ is accomplished. Now these demands and answers were propounded and rendred in the Hebrew tongue, long time before any other language was vsed in the world. For so soone after their scattering at Babel they could not well be incorporated into a common wealth: and as for religion, that was not kept but in the race of Sem, as Moses plainly declareth all through the historie of Abraham. Concerning the Prophets, their dreames and visions, God spake not, they vnderstood not, neither answered or taught they the Church but in the Hebrew; that significant, vnmingled, holy, chaste and heauenly tongue; whereas others lispe and stammer-out vncertaine sounds, and are infinite wayes defiled through the dishonest, foolish, erronious, and vngodly discourses of their inuentours: I except the bookes of the new Testament, and all writings drawne from the cleere fountaines of holy Scripture, besides the which there is nothing but vanitie, filth, wickednesse, and vngodlinesse in the world. Moreouer, the Lord himselfe setteth downe his law to his people, and writing it twise with his owne finger, and speaking with his owne mouth to Moses and his other seruants in the Mount, vsed the Hebrew tongue. So did the Angels and Prophets, and Iesus Christ spake the Syriacke, a tongue so deriued of the Hebrew, that they are very like; as their Grammars declare. The Apostles spake diuers tongues, and wrote also according to the people and persons with whom they had to doe: yet for all that in their bookes may be noted an infinite many of phrases borrowed of the Hebrew: as the learned interpreters of the new Testament haue exactly shewed.
The fift and last reason set downe by the Poet is, that the Hebrew words, especially the proper names (some are alledged for example, and many other may be added) are of great waight and importance: for sometimes they lay open vnto vs the chiefe things that doe befall the person so named. Nay further, if a man would take the paines to change the order of letters, hee may sinde in them many goodly mysteries. The Greekes haue found the way, and followed it in the interpretation of their proper names: but they come farre short of the liuelihood and maiestie of the Hebrewes, who begun the thing before them many hundred yeeres. As for other tongues the most part of their proper names haue no meaning; they are deuised at-all-auentures; so are they right tokens of barbarisme. Some tongues there are more happy and plentious than others in this behalfe: but their interpretations are for the most part vncertaine, especially if the Root thereof come not from or neere the Hebrew. Herehence againe the curious reader may take occasion of a large commentarie: I leaue it vnto him.
13. Then doe I theesalute. It is not without cause, that the Poet straight vpon the former discourse, vseth these words: considering the excellency of the Hebrew tongue, and that he setteth out in so few verses her wonderfull perfections, each one of them requiring a large treatise, and himselfe being vnable to shut vp so great matters in so few words. For example sake let vs consider but very briefly those three points that the Poet here toucheth: to wit, that the two and twenty Hebrew letters are full of hidden sense; that the proper names of persons, Countries, and Cities in this tongue are as much as abridgements of their life and deedes; that the names of birds, beasts and fishes, containe the history of their natures: howbeit since the fall of Adam the knowledge thereof is greatly darkened. To make the Reader somewhat more desirous to enter mediation hereon, I will set him downe some examples. Concerning the mysteries of the Hebrew Letter-row Eusebius and S. Ierom in his Epistle ad Paul. vrbic. which is the 155. expoundeth them, as I shall shew you in our tongue. The first letter [...] Aleph signifieth doctrine, [...] Beth a house, [...] Ghimel, Fulnesse, [...] Daleth Tables, [...] He This, [...] Vau and [...] Zain That or she there, [...] Cheth Life, [...] Teth Good, [...] Iod Beginning, [...] Chaph a Hand, [...] Lamed Discipline, or the Heart, [...] Mem Theirs, or of these, [...] Nun Continuall, [...] Samech Aide or succour, [...] Ain a Spring, or an Eye, [...] Phe a Mouth, [...] Sade Iustice, [...] Coph Calling, [...] Resch a Head, [...] Schin Teeth, [...] Tau Signes. All which may be thus put together and expounded. The Doctrine of the Church, which is the house of God, is found in the fulnesse of the Tables: that is, the holy Scriptures. This doctrine and that fulnesse of the tables is the life; for what life can we haue without the knowledge of holy Scripture? Out of these we learne Iesus Christ, who is the life of them that beleeue. And although this knowledge be excellent and perfect in God, yet as for vs, we know not but in part, we see as it were by a glasse in darknesse: But when we shall ascend vp into heauen, and become like vnto the Angels, then the doctrine of the house, and the fulnesse of the tables of Gods truth, shall be accomplished: then shall we see face to face the Good prince (to wit, God himselfe the Soueraigne Good, who is the Beginning of all things) euen as he is in his owne nature. In the mean-time we must lay Hand to the worke of our Calling, by the meanes of a right Discipline or a true Hart, assuring our selues that we shall finde Continuall Succour in this heauenly truth, which is the Spring or Eye of the Mouth of Iustice, namely Christ our Head, whose Calling is in Signes, or markes of Teeth or framed voyce of the Scripture. I desire the Reader to take in good part this short Allegorie that I am bold to make vpon the Hebrew Letters; and if he desire more in this kinde; let him repaire to the Roots of the essentiall words of these letters, there may he view the matter more at large. For this time it shall suffice to haue shot this arrow toward the marke our Poet aymed at.
Now for the second point touching the names of seuerall men, of Nations and Cities, I will note you a couple of examples of each: [...] Abraham signifieth a Father of many, so was his houshold much increased temporally and spiritually, hee is the Father of all the Beleeuers, whose number is vncountable. [...] Moses signifieth taken out of the waters, so was he by Pharaos daughter, when his mother, loth to haue him slaine according to the Kings cruell commandement, had laid him forth in a pitched flasket by the Riuers brinke, Exod. 2. By him also God guided his people through the waters of the red sea, and wrought many miracles. The Arabians are a people who euen at this day haue no certain place of abode, they wander still vp and downe the champion countries and wildernesse, they are famous theeues, and lurking in secret places, make often sallies out vpon their neighbours, and set vpon all passengers vnawares. Their name commeth of the Verbe [...] Arab, by Ain in the first Coniugation. [...] Hearib, which signifieth to mingle day and night together: and because that in a desert and waste place all things are confused, as if day and night were mingled together, therefore the countrie for the situation is called Arabia. This agreeth right with another [...] Arab, written by Aleph, which signifieth to he in ambush, or to lurke in dennes, as theeues and rauening beasts doe. The Aegyptians in the Scripture are called [...] Mitsraim, because of their strong holds and places of defence, that haue beene long amonst them: the primitiue word is [...] Tsor, that signifieth to trusse close together: In some places of Scripture Aegypt is called [...] Rahab, that signifieth Proud: so indeed they haue alwaies beene high-minded, and greater braggers than any other people. Now for Cities [...] Ierusalem signifieth The vision of peace, and iust according to the truth: for the peace and grace of God hath beene seene and continued vpon that place many hundred yeares, and chiefly because it hath beene a sigure of the Church militant and triumphant; as often mention is made of the new and heauenly Ierusalem. Babylon commeth of the word [...] Babel, which is deriued of the Verbe [...] Balal, to confound mingle, or trouble, as water when it is mudded. For so indeed the earthy Babel, that was in Chadaea, hath made a hotchpotch of the world: and that Babel, the spirituall, that is spoken of in the Reuelation, hath made so many confusions, that it is vnpossible to name them all.
There remaineth the third point, touching Birds, foure-footed Beasts, and Fishes, whereof and euery of them I will name two onely, for a patterne, lest I seeme too long in the Annotations. The Storke, so commended for her loue toward those by whom she receiued life, is called [...] Chasida, that is to say, dutifull, louing, and religious. The Eagle is called Nescher, that commeth neare to Shor and [...] Iashar, the one signifieth to looke the other to be rightfull: and this bird of all other hath the sharpest sight and looketh against the Sunne. There is further a liuely description of this bird in the 39. Chapter of Iob, as also of the Ostrich, and many other in diuers places of Scripture. The horse, called [...] Sus, is thought to come of the Verbe [...] Nasas, if rather this verbe be not thence deriued, which signifieth to aduance himselfe: for it is the brauest and siercest of all other foure-footed beasts: as Iob finely describeth him in his 39. Chapter. The Hebrues haue three names for a Lion; [...] Arieh, [...] Labi and La [...]jsch: the first commeth of a Verbe that signifieth to snatch, and teare in sunder: the second of the word [...] Leb, that signifieth the Hart, and [...] Laab, to be in solitary and desert places: the third is commonly interpreted a great and roaring Lion, not vnlike the Verbe [...] Losh, that signifieth to surprise or deuoure, for that this beast rampeth vpon and swalloweth vp his pray. The Whales and great fishes are called [...] Thannim, Snakes, Serpents, or Dragons, because they are of a great length, and turne and fold themselues euery way, and are no lesse dangerous in the Sea, than Serpents and Dragons on the land. In the 40. Chapter of Iob, that great Fish is called [...] Leuiathan, which some deriue of the Verbe [...] Lauah, which signifieth to borrow, or take a thing for his recreation: because the Whole seemeth to play vp and downe the sea, as in a place borrowed for recreation. The Crocodile, that liueth both on land and water, is called [...] Hatsab, and seemeth to come of the word [...] Tsab, which signifieth the couering of a Chariot, because this mightie creature hath so long and so thicke a skinne. More ouer, the Hebrues of the whole kinde of fishes speake commonly as if they were of another world, because they are so farre parted and seuered from the sight and conuersation of men: they make three sorts of them, which they expresse by the words [...] Dagh, [...] Thannim, and [...] Leuiathan. This haue I added the more to shew the liuelihood and naturall importance of this tongue, and herewith I will content my selfe at this time, desiring that some other, stirred vp by my example, would take this matter in hand, and discourse of it better and more at large.
15. For when Adam. Moses saith plainly, in the 19. and 20. verses of the second Chapter of Genesis: That God made all the beasts of the field, and fowles of the heauen come before Adam, to see how he would name them, and that howsouer he named euery thing liuing, so was the name thereof. The Man therefore gaue names vnto all Cattell, and to the Fowles of heauen, and to euery beast of the field. The wisdome, wherewith our first Father was endued before his fall, importeth thus much, that he should giue meet and couenable names vnto all creatures vnder his dominion: and although the knowledge and search of birds and beasts names be hard, because of the weaknesse of mans iudgement now since his fall, yet is it not vnpossible, as men well seene in the Hebrue tongue haue alreadie shewed.
16. And for each Bodie. Adam, a man perfectly wise before he sinned, gaue not only meet names to all creatures, that were (in a manner) the moueables and instruments of his house, and of this great shop of the world, whereof the Lord had made him master; but further enriched his language with all manner of ornaments that might be required to make it perfect: So that before his fall he spake more eloquently than any mortall man since. After he had sinned, entred ignorance into his vnderstanding, and frowardnesse into his affections: which haue made the speech of him and his posteritie vnfitting, vnparfit, deceiuable, and often false, euen in humane and indifferent things, yea such sometime as we most curiously study vpon: But the grace of God, the long life of this Patriarch, and his fresh remembrance of the wondrous things that he had seene in the Garden of Eden, haue brought to passe doubtlesse, that the conuersation, instruction, reports and authority of so great a personage, had a maruellous force to perswade and teach all those that were in his schoole. For from him had we [...]irst our Arts and Sciences deriued, and especially the knowledge of the true God. And although since his time things haue beene more and more illightened and p [...]rfited, yet must we needes confesse that Adam was the first teacher of them. Who so desireth to know the depth of his wisedome, let him at his leisure meditate vpon the foure first Chapters of Genesis, and he will confesse there is contained the summe of all that all men haue knowne, or shall vnto the worlds end. Now out of all doubt it is, that Adam taught his children and their posterity all these things exactly. But Moses, by the direction of the spirit of God, thought it sufficient to tepresent onely the ground of things: otherwise the world neither had not would euer be able to containe the bookus that might be made vpon these foure first Chapters.
17. This tongue that Adam spoke. The first world continued 1656 yeeres. Adam liued 930. yeeres, his posterity kept his language, and although they possessed with their tents and dwellings a large peece of ground, yet is there no place of Scripture to be found, whereout may be gathered any proofe of the diuersity of tongues before the flood. There being then but one, it must needes be the same that Adam taught his children: as may also appeare by this, that all proper names vntill the flood are Hebrew. Noe the true sonne of Adam retained and spoke this tongue, and taught it his children. And although three or foure score yeeres before the Floud they began to spread abroad themselues, and corruption grew more and more among them (as by that may be gathered, that is written of Nimrod and Asshur, and the children of Cham, Genesis the 10.) yet in the beginning of the eleuenth Chapter Moses witnesseth that at what time they, that came to dwell in the plaine of Sennaar, spake of building the Citie and Tower afterward called Babel, all the earth was one language and one speech: which I vnderstand not only of those that dwell in the plaine of Sennaar, but of all people then liuing in the world. It is likely that they that came out of the East Countries, and setled themselues in Sennaar were a great number. They spake Hebrue, but when consusion befell their tongue, some drew one way, others another way, and in continuance of time their Hebrue varying by meanes of their separation was embased, and euery seuerall people had their language apart. As for such as were not mingled in this disorder, namely the families of Sem, or the most part of them, they kept the originall and primitiue tongue, whereof Heber was the chiefe professour at the confusion of Babel; and thence it commeth (as it is thought) that the tongue was called Hebrue, and the people Hebrues; as Abraham, in whose family that speech remained, is surnamed an Hebrue. The Poet, with some interpretors, leaues it in doubt whether Heber was among the builders of Babel, or dwelt apart. I thinke with some others, that he was not of the number, but hearing how the Tower-builders were scattered, hee gaue the name of Peleg (that is, Diuision) to his sonne that then was borne: because (saith Mases, Genes. 10.25.) that in his time the earth was diuided. Thus much of the Hebrue tongue, which was after preserued by Moses and the high Priests, the Iudges, Kings and Prophets. Now let vs consider what the Poet saith further as touching those other tongues, that first arising of the Hebrue, were after the confusion a hundred thousand waies altered and disguised by the nations liuing asunder, who themselues inuented, and carried new words and language, each to the place of their abode.
17. But softly-sliding Age. The Poet here entreth into consideration of other tongues beside the Hebrew: and saith these first tongues that begun in Babel, being all (as it were) Meslins of Hebrew, by tract of time are so worne out, that each one of them hath engendred a many others, as a man may quickly vnde [...]stand, if he consider the great varietie of ancient people that were before the Greekes and Latines. It shall suffise at this present thus to haue pointed hereat in a word. Who so is desirous of more, let him cast his eye vpon the three first and principall Monarchies, and all the diuers Nations subiect vnto them, and mentioned in the Chronicles of the world: the Abridgement of all is to be found in the first Volumne of the Historicall librarie of N. Vignier.
18. And language altereth. He sheweth by diuers reasons whence commeth [Page 71] the change of tongues. First, the trafficke that one countrey people hath with another, as well by sea (which he calleth, Th'azur'd Amp [...]e) as also by land, is cause why we learne some new words, as if we made no lesse exchange of words than of wares. Secondly, a writer that dares venter, and is desirous to enrich his mother-tongue, decketh it bol [...]ly w [...]th that which he borroweth of others, setteth forgotten words on foot againe, inuenteth new words, colouring and fashioning them according. Thirdly, time altereth a speech; as we see it doth all things else; that we might be forced thereby daily more and more to see and confesse, that nothing is sure and stedfast vnder heauen; and to beat downe also the vanitie of [...]ans conceit, who commonly vaunteth himselfe and taketh pride in such things as haue nothing constant in them but their owne vnconstancy.
19. A courage bold. This commeth too neere the second reason to be counted a fourth. The French Commentar must pardon me; I thinke rather the Poet hauing spoken of Writers, Merchandise and Time, the right and onely meanes whereby new words and phrases are first brought into a language: here he sheweth vs how they are accepted, for as before he touched in a word that the Courts dislike of old words bred their disuse; so here he telleth vs plainly that the authoritie of him, that deuiseth or vseth new words, is cause of their acceptance: which is afterward confirmed by vse, Q [...]empenes arbitrium est, & vis & norma loquendi: as Horace writeth. But forasmuch as vse without Art draweth a language head-long into Barbarisme, and so out of request, and Art without authoritie of Empire, shutteth it vp in a narrow compasse, he saith, that the Hebrew, Latine, and Greeke, had all these maintaining meanes, whereby they haue continued [...]o long, and spred so farre abroad. So beginneth he cunningly to make his passage from words and phrases vnto entire languages, the better to come at length to that excellent discourse, that followeth in the next Section, vpon all the principall tongues now spoken or knowne in the world. As for the Hebrew, besides the perfections aboue mentioned, he saith, in it God hath reuealed his will, and that it is the originall of the diuine Law: both of great force to make the tongue far [...]e knowne, and continue long: it had further the Art and knowledge of high Priests and Prophets, the wisedome and state of Salomon, and was a long time vsed and accustomed to be spoke in the famous [Page 72] commonwealth of the Iewes. But these because they belong not vnto that tongue onely, but as well to the other two, the Poet here le [...]ueth our. The Greeke he saith, in her bookes containeth at large all the liberall Sciences: a great cause and most proper to the Greeke: the rest as common to the others are let passe. The Latine more graue and forcible then the Greeke (that was a more neat and wanton tongue) was aduanced and continued in request by the Romans force of armes: whose Empire was the greatest and most warlike of all the rest; and therefore is this cause here onely mentioned, as most proper to the Latine tongue, and the rest omitted. These three tongues doe at this day farre surpasse all others; but vngodlinesse and contempt of the true Diuinitie, is cause why the Hebrew is not esteemed as it deserueth: the more is it regarded of them that know it. As for the Greeke, that which is now commonly spoken is very grosse. The pure and good Greeke is contained within the bookes of Plato, Aristotle, Zenophon, Demosthenes, Iscerates, Homer, Euripides, Sophocles, Plutarch, Basil, Nastanzen, Chrysostome, and many others. The Latine, after some ignorant and vnlearned men had gready embased it, was refined and set on foot againe within these fourescore yeeres, at what time there flourished many great and learned personages in Europe, as Melancthon, Erasmus, Picus Myrand. and others: but they come short of that grace and liuelihood that the ancient Latine writers haue: Cicero, Caesar, Liuie, Virgill, Horace, and a number of others well enough knowne: of whom (as also of the most excellent authors in other tongues) the Poet here goes about to entreat.
20 Tracing these latter lines. Before he endeth this Booke or discourse, hauing begun to speake of tongues, and their comparison one with another, he taketh thence occasion to set before our eyes the three principall tongues, Hebrue, Greeke, and Latine, accompanied with six other greatly now-a-daies esteemed throughout all Europe. For this purpose, and to enrich his Poem with some new ornament, worthy the things he treateth of; he declareth, how being weary with ouer-watching himselfe in these his former studies, he cast him on his bed and slept; yet so as the earnest desire he had to delight and profit his country-men, kept still his soule awake; which caused him to see in his Dreame the Vision here following. A fine inuention, and framed to the imitation of the best ancient Poets both Greeke and Latine, who, being to handle matters of great importance, are wont by such deuices cunningly to prouoke the Readers to marke and giue care vnto them.
21. And golden-winged Dreame. Of Dreames and their causes hath beene spoken sufficiently in the first day of this second Weeke, intituled Eden, page the 46, 47, 48, &c. hauing here to speake of a Dreame cleere and easie to be conceiued, he distinguisheth it from such as are darksome and deceiueable, saying it was about the dawning of the day, when the golden-winged (that is, the sweet, pleasant, and vntroubled) Dreame came forth at the Christall gate in the East: as much to say, as when the day-starre ariseth, or the morning draweth on, we feele (if we were awake before) sleepe gently seazing on vs, and our spirits comming and going, as it were, thorow Christall gates: for then be Dreames and Visions cleerest and best distinguished; [Page 77] whereas before our meat be fully digested, our braine ouer-loden with vapours, receiueth but troublesome impressions, waued so to and fro, and so enterlaced one with another, that in the twinkling of an eye, it frameth a thousand shapes, that presently vanish away, and are no more remembred. Now the Poet saith, he was guided (as he thought) into a place mo [...] delightfull, which he describeth in few verses, and it is very fit for the matter following.
22 Iust in the middle point. First he describeth the dwelling of Eloquence: to wit, on a great Rocke, wrought and fashioned in manner of a foor-stall, or base for an image to stand on: to shew how stedfast and certaine a thing this excellent gift of God is. Secondly, the resemblance or Image of Eloquence, he calleth a Colosse, that is, of stature surpassing all others: which betoketh thus much, that eloquent and faire spoken men goe many degrees beyond others, whom they vse at their pleasure, and draw whither they list, as the example of Pericles and Cicero declare, and many proofes thereof are found in the holy Scripture. He maketh this Image of Brasse, which implieth the faire glosse, the sweet sound and strong force of Eloquence; he placeth in the left hand a fire-brand, to signifie that learned, true, and faire vtterance maketh men see and touch (as it were) the right nature of things: in the right hand an Ewer, because the speech of the wise dampeth and putteth out the flame of passions. I might note hereof many examples, but I leaue them for the diligent Reader to search: meaning here to offer him but Annotations, which I feare alreadie are growen too long. The little chaines that come forth from the Images golden tongue, and draw such a [Page 78] number of hearers by the eares and heart, signifie the great power of a well framed speech: the truth whereof appeareth chiefely in preaching the word, in counsels of graue common-wealths-men, and orations of good Magistrates and valiant Captaines. In this manner did the ancient Frenchmen paint and set out their Hercules, surnamed Ognius: whereupon Alciat hath made a pretie Embleme: it is the 180. expounded at large by Cl. Minos. The summe of all is, that Eloquence is to be preferred before force. Our Poet aimeth at that description. Further concerning the Bore, the Tygre, and the Beare, lying tame at the feet of this Image, it signifieth that a pleasant and learned speech appeaseth all angrie, cruell, and sauage men; and cuen the maddest and most brutish people in the world: it maketh the woods and hills to daunce and leape: that is to say, it moueth, bendeth and instructeth very block-heads, and such as are most hard of vnderstanding; and this may be the meaning of those fained tales of Amphion, Orpheus, Arion, and other like. Lastly, this Image is inuironed with a double ranke of pillers, well and strongly grounded and vnder-pinned, that beare vp in due proportion the nino languages following, each by her owne chiefe authors and maintainers. For euery pillar was wrought in fashion of a man, and framed to the countenance of one of their best writers in a long gowne, or stole. And that is the meaning of the French à la Cariatide: After the Carian right: as Vitruuius writeth at large in the first Chapter of his first booke of Architecture. This I note because the French Commenter lets it passe, and it troubled my selfe to vnderstand it at the first.
23. Among the blessed wits. For chiefe props of the Hebrue tongue (which he placeth in the fore-front of Eloquence, as in euery regard it was meet, whether we cofider the sweet grauitie, the natural impliance, the shortnes, hautines, liuelines of it: or the sincerity, holines, light, & heauenly Maiestic) he nameth first Moses, because he is the most anciēt of those whose writings in this tongue are extant. As for the book of the Prophesie of Henoch, it was lost a long time agoe. He describeth this holy Law-writer after an excellent manner, as was requisite in a discourse of eloquence. His face shineth like a blasing Star: alluding to that in the Scripture, that Moses comming downe frō the Mount where he had talked with God, his face so shined, that none was able to behold his countenance; in so much as he was faine to weare a vaile ouer it: the rest is very easie to be vnderstood, especially of such as haue neuer so lightly turned ouer the history. Now for the bookes of Moses, they were written many hundred yeares before the Greekes were knowne: who were not heard of in the world, but a little before the reigne of Saul, & had but few workes in writing, or none at all, till after the time of Salomon, as their owne Histories witnesse, whosoeuer will take paines to turne them ouer. Nay further, all their knowledge came from the Aegyptians, Phenicians and others, who had leaned somewhat by conuersing with the Hebiues. And to come againe to Moses, he hath beene in maruellous account with insinite Heathen Writers. If any haue lightly regarded, or found fault with him, it was either because they vnderstood him not at all, or maliced him exceedingly, which a man may easily finde in their writings. The second [Page 79] Author of the Hebrue he counteth Dauid, whose Psalmes he speaketh of much in few lines; but little it is in comparison of their excellencie, whereof many ancient and late Writers haue spoken notable things: I will not heape them vp here, assuring my selfe that all true Christians will grant me that the Book of Dauids Psalmes is (as Saint Basil saith) the Storehouse and treasurie of all good learning, for all men to come at; and will confesse with Saint Ierome, and Saint Chrysostome, that nothing better becommeth a man, be he Peasant or Crafts-man, great or small, than to sing vnto the Lord the praises and thankesgiuing in these excellent songs contained: the very liuely and true Anatomies of a beleeuing soule. O how cursed and abominable before God and his Church are those wicked ones, that haue forbidden Christians the vnderstanding and vse of them, and banished them out of Christendome: that haue suffered, allowed, maintained, commanded, and commended vnto the people these shamefull and wanton Poesies, these books of vanitie, error, and leasings, which with their Authors deserue the fire: not the quiet and peaceable persons, that call vpon Iesus Christ, and belecue stedfastly the life euerlasting. The soule that feareth God will not take this my digression ill, nor thinke it needlesse: As for the vngodly, let them spit at it, if they will, I regard them not. The third Author and ornament of the Hebrue, is reckoned Salomon in his Prouerbs, the Booke of the Preacher, and the Song of Songs, bookes more besprinckled with golden words and notable sentences, than his Crowne was with pretious stones and pearles embossed. Happie is the man that taketh delight to marke and daily thinke vpon so profitable and necessary instructions. The fourth is the Prophet Esay, the sonne of Amos, right such a one as the Poet hath described. These foure hee thought sufficient to name, because they haue most Writings extant, and are withall exceeding cloquent, as might easily be proued by particulars, if I were to write a Commentary, or a whole discourse thereof.
24. The Greeke. Homer, his Illias and Odyssea containing 48. bookes, is the most ancient Greeke Author we haue: his inuentions are wonderfull, his vaine naturall, his verses smooth, and full of Art, and the more they are considered, the greater grace they haue. There is also in them a hidden sense, and the very well-spring of all humane knowledge; as may appeare by that infinite peeces of his poesies are cited in the bookes of ancient and late Phylosophers, Geographers, Historiographers and Orators, as Plutarch and others witnesse. The next to Homer is Plato, not in time but in worthinesse: he is called the diuine Phylosopher, because he is so maruellous pure, so high and lofty in all his disconrses; the true scholler of him that professing himselfe to know but one thing, namely that he knew nothing, declared that he knew all things that might be learned in the world, as touching the world. For concerning the knowledge of saluation, Plato and his maister both were ignorant: and sith all other knowledge is nothing in comparison of that (the more are we bound to God that haue it) he said most truely, that he knew nothing. The third is Herodotus, who writeth in the Ionick Dialect, that is a kinde of Greeke differing a little in phrases and pronuntiation from the common-spoken, [Page 80] as some farre scituate shires doe from the Court or mother-Citie of their Countrie: in diuers points it agreeth with the French. Plutarch dealeth somewhat too roughly with this worthy Historiographer, in whose defence I will oppose the authoritie of a learned man of our time; who in a certaine Preface of his, saith of Herodotus: Narrationes eius sunt disertae, iudicationes expressae, speciosae, explicationes accuratae & euidentes, collectiones certae atqueplenae, in his rerum gestarum, hominum, temporum fides, accurata compertorum relatio, dubiorum coniccturasag [...]x, sabulosorum verecunda commemoratio, miravbique simplicitas, & eximius quidam candor. See the great praises, and perfections of a graue Historiographer. The fourth is Demosthenes, the prince of Greeke Orators, the very rule and square of all that endeuour to speake eloquently, a man that leadeth other mens mindes as he list, excellent in all his discourses: which are extant, the most of them, and read to the great vse and prosit of those that know how to apply them.
25. Then he of Anthonie and Catiline great foe. That is Cicero, surnamed the father of Eloquence: he is the first and chiefe of those that grace and maintaine the Latine tongue. He was extreamely hated of Marke Anthonie and Catiline, both whom he hath also bitterly pursued and touched to the quicke, as his Catilinarie and Philippicke Orations declare: the often printing of his workes, and learned mens continuall reading of them, and borrowing thence the best graces of their writings, doe proue his learning, eloquence and plentie of speech to be such as the Poet here describeth. The second is Caesar, the most valiant of eloquent men, and most eloquent of valiant men, as may well appeare by his life in Plutarch, and his Commontaries de bello Gallico: by which worke he hath wrung the pen out of learned mens hands, and in a manner discouraged them all from writing Histories, because they see such perfection therein, as they are not able to come neere. The third is the Historiographer Salust: we haue of his workes, besides diuers Orations, two Histories remaining, Coniuratio Catilinae: & bellum Iugurthinum, short they are, but full of sentence and sinewes, witnessing the ancient force and vigor of the Roman tongue. The Reader may hereto adde the commendations of these three Authors, as they are in many learned bookes of late writers here and there scattered. As for those that thinke Cicero bableth without learning, and that Caesar the Dictatour and first Emperour wrote not these Commentaries that beare his name, and that Salust writeth a hard and forced stile: because their accusations are false, and they so farre out of the way, I thinke them worthy none other answer, than our Poets few verses here. Of the fourth, which is the Poet Virgil, too much cannot be spoken: his bookes of Georgickes and Aeneidos, being such maruellous workes, and so farre exceeding all other bookes of humanitic: I speake not onely for the excellence of his verse; but sure in the depth of his inuentions, his iudgement, his decence, his modestie, his grauitie, and his state, how much he doth outstrip and goe beyond all others, may be seene not onely in euery booke of his, but euen in euery verse; wherein is contained a thousand thousand secrets, and as it were the abridgement of all kinde of Arts and knowledge; besides his proper tearmes, his Epythites alway fit, his metaphors [Page 81] and figures sow'n and sprinkled in their right places, and his speech quite throughout eloquent and pure, without any bodging or dawberie whatsoeuer. The learned Caesar Scaliger, among many others, hath plainly and at large declared in his Art of Poetrie, the excellency of this Author.
26. Th'Italian. For ornament of the Italian, a language risen of the Roman or Latine, he nameth three Poets and one Orator, slipping diuers writers of historie and Secretaries, that haue left diuers excellent workes, Orations, and Epistles among vs. The reason is (I thinke) because these foure containe in them all the graces of the others. He nameth also the Tuscan tongue, because of all the diuers Dialects of Italie the Luquish, Milanish, Geneuish, and Venetian, none are so pure and fine as the Florentine or Tuscan. Iohn Boccace hath written long time agoe, but a very fine and pure stile; as his Decameron, his Fiametta, the Philocope, The Laberinth, and his other bookes witnesse, that with the world are in so great request. Francis Petrach hath written since, and inuented goodly words, and partly by his owne pregnant wit, partly by imitation of the best Authors, hath enriched the tongue with many graces: he hath ventured also farre and made Sonets, Chapters, and Cantoes wonderfull curious. Then Ludouico Ariosto of Ferara hath set forth a legend of Loue, entituled Orlando furioso, in verses sweet and meet, famous throughout all Italie; he is full of affections in his discourse, and as delightfull as is possible, by reason of the varietie of that fabulous matter he writeth of, which he shadoweth so cunningly, that the Reader is therewith often affected and mou [...]d, as if it were a true storie, or at least not altogether false. Torquato Tasso is last of the foure in time of writing, but in account (as the Poet saith) the first and chiefe: he was the sonne of Bernardo Tasso that eloquent man, whose excellent Epistles are in print. This his sonne hath written in twenty bookes or Cantoes, of stately verse, a poeme the best of all Italians, entituled Gierusalemme liberata, all the graces and riches of the Greekes and Latines are there gathered together, all wrought into it after the best manner, so graue, so short, so learned, so comely, so liuely, so stately, as if it were the worke of another Virgil. There are also printed at Ferrara three volumnes of his workes, containing other kindes of verse, and all sorts of fine inuentions, a Comedie, a Tragedie, diuers Dialogues and discourses in prose, all are worth reading, and all make good the iudgement that our Poet hath giuen of the Authour.
27. The language Arabicke. This language is comen of the Hebrew: among other learned mens bookes that haue made this tongue of account, we haue the workes of Aben Rois, that is, the sonne of Kings: for Ben signifieth a sonne in Hebrew: and the Arabians adde to the beginning this preposition A, and sometime Al. This Aben Rois is the same that we commonly call Auerroës, the Commentar, a very excellent Philosopher. He hath commented vpon most of Aristotle, and is translated into Latine, printed at Venice; the worke doth shew the deepe reach and subtill braine of the man. Auicen was a great Rhilosopher and Physitian, as his writings also declare. Gesner saith Auerroës was of Cordway, and Auicen of Seuill, and so I thinke: but it appeareth by their workes that they were both Arabians, and professed [Page 82] the superstition of Mahomet. As for Eldebag, Iohannes Leo writeth of him in the fift booke of his description of Asticke. This poet borne at Malaga in Grenade, of great name thorough all the parts of Buggie and Thunes, was very eloquent in the Arabian tongue, and wonderfull sharpe in railing on those that did him hurt: he made the men of Tebesse feele it in a Satyre he wrote against them, the effect whereof is this: that Nature knowing the Tebessians should be men of little worth and very swine, would make no good thing grow about their Citie but Nuts. The last, to wit, Ibnu-farid, the French Commentar knoweth not what he was, and I cannot learne.
28. The Dutch, For the Dutch or Almaine tongue hee setteth vs downe Michaell Beuther, who very well hath translated the Latine Commentaries of Sleidan: the next is Luther borne at Islebe, as learned and eloquent a man as any was among the Diuines and Preachers of Germanie, as all will confesse, that haue read his workes in Dutch: he Preached and read Diuinitie the space of many yeeres at Wytteberg in Saxony. Then Gasper Peucer son in law to Phillip Melancibon, an excellent Philosopher, Mathematician, and Phisitian, as his workes declare. And lastly Peter Beutricke, Counceller to Duke Iohn Cosimer, and chiefe dealer for him with diuers Princes; lately deceased. I could name you many more, but I content my selfe, as the poet hath done, with these foure.
29. Then Gueuare. The Bookes of Anthony de Gueuare, du Bosean, de Grenade, de Gracylace, haue beene for the most part, translated into Latine, Italian and French: but they are farre better in their Castilian: which is the most pure Dialect of the Spanish tongue, and wherein the men of learning and good nourtriture are wont ordinarily to write and speake. And these foure the poet hath chosen for the most eloquent writers in this tongue: yet nothing foredeeming diuers others that haue written well both in verse and prose; as namely Osias, whom but for his old Dialect, he iudgeth as good an author as the other.
30. The speech of English. For ornament of the English tongue he nameth Sir Thomas Moore and Sir Nicholas Bacon both Lord Chauncellours: the first of them was very learned in the Arts and tongues: the second exceeding well seene in the common lawes of England: and both very eloquent in their mother language. As for Sir Philip Sidney he deserueth no lesse commendation then the poet hath giuen him. Chaucer deserueth the like commendation here that Osias did among the Spanish Authors.
31. But what new Sunne is this. He maketh a digression in praise of the Queene of England, who the space of seuen and thirty yeeres hath gouerned her Realme in great prosperitie; so as, during the troubles and ouerthrowes of other kingdomes about her, herselfe and her people haue beene preserued from infinite dangers. This famous Queene hath also the tougues, here mentioned by the poet, very par fit, and at this day by the singular grace of God she is accounted the precious pearle of the North, and very fortunate in all the warres she taketh in hand: her happy successe and victories are euery way so memorable, that they deserue to be written in a large historie, and reuerenced of all posteritic.
32. But what are these of France? Clement Marot worthy to be admired for his time, in regard of the ignorance and barbarisme that raigned in Europe many yeeres before him, hath led the Muses ouer the Alpes, and arrayed them after the French fashion: as witnesseth, among other his workes, the translation of nine and fortie Psalmes of Dauid, a worke that will continue in account as long as Yea and Nay are spoken, euen to the worlds end. Indeed he wanteth that Art, and those fine deuices that some later Writers haue; but euen in this want, and these imperfections he hath done wonderous well; and sheweth in his naturall vaine, that if he had list he could haue beene excellent: yea in some points and places he hath so done alreadie, as the best of them all could haue done no better. For translations wee haue Iacques Amiot, who hath turned into French the Aethiopian Historie of Heliodorus, seuen bookes of Diodorus Siculus, and all Plutarch, wherein he hath laboured to very good purpose, and with happie successe: I would to God he had set his hand also to Thucidides, Xenophon, and Seneca: his stile is pure and naturall, not affected, not forced; right good and true French. Blase Viginere hath also translated many bookes, as the Polonian History, a part of Liuie, Caesar, Chalcondylas, Philostratus, three Dialogues of Friendship, and the Psalmes in free verse, all which I haue read ouer and againe, yet doe I preferre Amiot before him. Indeed I finde in Viginere a very ready stile and matter well chosen, but the other (I know not how) me thinkes hath a better cariage of himselfe. The S [...]iour de Vauprinas in his French Librarie saith, of all the foster-children of the Muses, that were bred in France, Viginere hath so written, that, as well for learning, as for eloquence of speech, he hath preuented all that shall come after him, and as it were shut the gate against them. See what a commendation here is: I leaue the Reader to iudge of our opinions. Our Poet stayeth in doubt, but I haue beene bold to goe further; I trust without any great offence: in this consisteth not the good or bad state of France. Concerning Poets, he nameth Peter Ronsard, who hath made himselfe rich with Greeke and Latine spoiles, as his Treatises of Loue, his Odes, Elegies, and Hymnes doe witnesse: wherein a man may reade all sorts of verses, and all kinde of matter, sometimes in a low stile, sometimes in a meane, sometimes in a loftie stile: For which the Poet calleth him Great Ronsard. I will note here a notable speech of his: After our Poets first Weeke was come forth in Print, being asked his opinion of the worke, he answered, alluding to the title, Mounsieur du Bartas hath done more in one weeke, than I haue done in all my life time. As for Philip de Mornay, Lord of Plessie Marly, his learned worke of the truth of Christian Religion, honoured thus by the true title, and written in good French, with liuely reasons there gathered together, moueth and draweth to his purpose, that is, to acknowledge the truth, all that reade it with a heart desirous of peace and good. The like may be said of his Discourse of Life and Death, of his Treatise of the Church, his Meditations, and some Epistles and Demonstrations of his. For all his Writings are strengthened with Arguments, Inductions, and proofes inuincible, and all in a stile with grauitie and sweetnesse mixed, well knit, and [Page 84] well sounding, and easie enough to those that are neuer so little acquainted with it. The Poet hauing so liuely represented his Vision, endeth his discoarse [Page 85] of Elequence, and her most renowned sauourer in euery Language, and so shut vp his sixt Booke: Which is the second of the second day of his second Weeke.
LES COLONIES. The third Booke of Noe, or the Colonies.
1. What twilightie cloud. The Poet being to make in and out so many wayes, and crosse so many seas and countries, huge and vnknowne, good cause he had to demand (as he doth) a greater helpe than mans wit can afford, such as the children of Israel had, a cloud by day, and a piller of fire by night, to guide them thorow the wildernesse; and surely God gaue him a a very extraordinary gift, otherwise he had neuer beene able so well and briefely to haue comprised so many, hard, and worthy matters, as he hath done, in lesse than six hundred verses. He saith here further, that each peoples place of abode was ordained of God before the paire of man (that is, Adam and Eue) had receiued in Paradise their twifold-one beginning; that is, before Adam was created of earth, and Eue of one of his ribs: noting thereby, how of one they were made two in creation, and after of two one by mariage. And so before the world was made, the Lord had in his eternall deeree marked and skored out the dwelling places of all people: it remained therefore that the same deeree should be accomplished, as appeared afterward.
2. Thou Holy-holy Flame. The Pole-starre is the Marriners guide: but here the Poet asketh another manner helpe to shew him the right way in his trauell: and glancing at the maruellous new Starre that appeared to the Wise-men that came out of the East to see and worship our Sauiour Iesus Christ, then borne in Bethlem, he calleth on the Holy Ghost the true light of our vnderstanding, auerring that although the matter which he hath taken in hand, constraines him to discourse sometime of one thing, and sometime of another, yet is Iesus Christ the chiefe ma [...]ke he almeth it, vnto whom the desire is to lead his Reader, as also whatsoeuer is set vs downe in the doctrine of Moses, the Prophets and Apostles, tendeth to the selfe-same end. This the Poets holy desire makes much to the shame of those, that hauing themselues an vncleane heart, by setting their filthy workes in print, desile also the eyes and eares of many, whom (as much as in them lies) they lead vnto the Deuill.
3. The men who built. That which the Poet saith concerning the affright of these builders, is implied by the words of Moses, Gen. 11.8. they ceased to build: by the one is the other vnderstood: for vpon the sudden chance of so strange a confusion, they were scarred, as with a thunder-clap, and after by necessitie constrained to sunder themselues. Yet I am of their opinion, who thinke the diuersitie of tongues is to bee considered, not in euery particular builder, but only in families. As that the goodnesse of God was such in his iudgement, that the builders departing thence, each led his wife and children with him, who vnderstood and spake as he did, otherwise mans life could hardly haue beene sustained. They also that parted furthest at the first from those of Noes successors that were not leagued in this presumptuous enterprise, soonest forgat all their former language. And true it is, that at the first they sundered not all very farre one from another: but, as it pleased God more and more to encrease them, they sought further and further for new countries to dwell in, and all by the secret direction of the wonderfull prouidence of God.
4 That great King of heau'n. Hee reacheth euen to the first cause of the Colonies, and diuers-way-partings of Noes posteritie. Staight after the Floud God blessed Noe and his children and said, Encrease and multiply, and fill the earth: and the feare of you, and the dread of you shall be vpon euery beast of the earth, and vpon euery fowle of the heauen, vpon all that moueth vpon the earth, and vpon all the fishes of the sea, into your hands are they deliuered, Gen. 9.1, 2. Therefore if the builders had continued and fast setled themselues in the Plaine of Sennaar, they had (as much as was in them) made void the Lords blessing, and berest themselues and their posteritie of those great priuiledges which he had granted them. But the deree of God must needs be fulfilled, and therefore according to his ordinance he chaseth farre away these donataries, to the end that yeare by yeare, some in one place, and some in another, they may take possession of that which was giuen them, the whole compasse of the world. Whereas the Poet saith further, that the Lord diuided the whole earth into three Lots, that may be gathered out of [Page 88] the tenth Chapter of Genesis, and 32. Chap. of Deuteronom. vers. 8. Noe a wise and learned man, and one of groat experience, was the instrument of Gods blessing in this behalfe: and though the bounds of these habitations be not all and throughly specisied, as were the diuisions of the Land of Canaan among the Tribes of Israel, yet out of the tenth Chapter of Genesis a man may gather, that in those daies Noe and his sonnes, and their posteritie, knew more a great deale hereof, than men can now perceiue: as may appeare by so many diuers Colonies, so many strange languages, so many names changed and rechanged. A good Commentary vpon this Chapter would assoile many questions hereabouts arising.
5 To Sem was giuen. Because the sonnes of Noe were but three, therefore here are named but three quarters of the world, the East, West, and South: Some of the successors of Iaphet peopled the North also, as shall be shewed hereafter. Concerning the names of these foure cardinall points, somewhat hath beene said vpon discourse of the winds, in the second day of the first weeke, verse 571. The order of the sonnes of Noe is this, Iaphet is the elder, Sem the second, Cham the last, Gen. 9.24. & 10.21. But Sem is named first, because of the fauour of God shewed to his posteritie, by thence raising the Messias, and there maintaining his Church. Iaphet the second, for that in the vocation of the Gentiles he is receiued into the reuts of Sem, that is, vnited to the family of the faithfull Abraham, according to the Prophecie and blessing of Noe, Gen. 9.27. Now in the tenth of Gen. vers. 25. Moses further affirmeth, that Heber, Sems vnder nephew had two sonnes, the one named Peleg, which signifieth Diuision, or parting asunder (for in his time the Earth was diuided) and the other Ioktan. Whereout some gather, that in the time of Peleg, that is (as I take it) before the cofusion of tongues, Noe and his sonnes remembred the grant that God had made them of all [Page 89] the Earth: and that Noe then made a kinde of partition thereof among his sonnes. If we recken the confusion of the builders, together with the partition of the world, though about the fiftieth yeare of Peleg, who was borne but an hundred yeares after the Floud, and liued 239. this confusion must happen within 150. yeares after the Floud: which were very soone: yet some take it sooner, as from the time that Peleg receiued his name, for remembrance (as they say) of both things so note-worthy to all posteritie, and especially to the Church of God: which well might be aduertised therof; for Peleg liued 46. yeares after the birth of Abraham, as appeareth by the eleuenth Chapter of Genesis. Two things then are here to be considered: the one, that the partition of the Earth, which Noe made, was to his posteritie a token of Gods great blessing, which neuerthelesse the Babel-builders for their part haue turned into a curse: the other, that this partition (as many Diuines and Chroniclers thinke) was made before Nimrod and his traine came out of the East, and sate downe in the plaine of Sennaar, what time they were scattered thence again by the confusion. Whereunto this I will adioyne, that as then the builders language was confounded: so by continuance of time, the speech of others also was corrupted, especially when they began to forget the true Religion, which euen in Sems family was decayed, as appeareth plainely out of the 24. Chapter of Iosua, where it is said that Terah, father to Abraham and Nachor, had serued strange gods. It was no reason that the Holy tongue should remaine entire and vncorrupt with such as had corrupted the seruice of God. But the Lord being mercifull vnto Abraham, restored to him againe, and kept for his faithfull children the first Language, which had not beene so much corrupted in the family of Sem, who parted not so farre from his father.
6. This Countrey. He setteth downe the lots of Sem, Cham, and Iaphet, first in generall: after meaning to shew the particular Colonies of each. So then to Sem he allotteth Asia. The proofe of these seuerall shares may be gathered out of the tenth Chapter of Genesis. It is not meant that Sem in his owne life-time tooke possession of this huge plot of groūd, although he liued 600 yeers: but the posteritie of his fiue sonnes ouer-spred it by succession of time, as the Poet declares at large hereafter; and a man may perceiue some token hereof, in that Moses reckoneth in the foresaid Chapter the sonnes of Joktan the sonne of Heber peti-sonne of Arphaxad, sonne of Sem. Now before I shew the bounds here noted by the Poet in this lot of Sem, I will set downe the description and deuision of Asia, as now it is. The map-drawers of our time differ in their order: some consider it by the whole masse; others by the seaborders and parts best knowne, which they reckon to be nine, and those particularly deciphered in the first chapter of the twentieth booke of the Portugall historie. But this kinde of deuision, because it is more obscure and farther from my purpose, I leaue, and rest on the other, which deuides the masse of Asia into siue principall parts: the first, which is ouer-against Europe, and vnder the Emperour of Moscouie, is bounded with the frozen sea, the riuer Ob, or Oby, the lake of Kittay, and the land-straight that is betwixt the Caspian and Euxine sea. The second is Tartary subiect to the great Cham, which abutteth Southward on the Caspian sea, the hill Imaus and the riuer Juxartes; Northward and Eastward on the Ocean, and Westward vpon Moscouie. The third part is possessed by the Turke, and containeth all that lyes betweene the Euxine, Aegean and Midland seas, and so further betwixt Egypt, the Arabian and Persian Gulfes, the riuer Tygris, the Caspian sea, and the land-straight there. The fourth is the Kingdome of Persia, abutting Westward on the Turke, Northward on the great Cham, Eastward on the riuer Indus, and Southward on the Indian sea. As for the fist part, it is the same which we call the East-Indies, so named of the riuer Indus, and distinguished the higher from the lower by the famous riuer Ganges. These Indies are very large Countries, as the Maps declare, and front out Southward as farre as Malaca, hauing besides, an infinite sort of Ilands great and small, which the Card-men haue well set downe, both in Maps and writing. Now see we the manner how the Poet considereth Asia. He takes it first by right line from North to South, to wit, from the Peake, foreland or cape of Perosites as farre as Malaca, where he taketh in the Moluckes and Taprobana, and from thence riseth againe to Zeilan and Bisnagar. Then draweth another line from the [Page 91] Maior or Euxine sea on the West, to the straights of Anien Northeast, and toucheth by the way some few Countries most note-worthy, reseruing the rest vntill his particular description of the Colonies: which followeth from the 297. verse vnto the 319.
To make plaine some words in the text, the Peake of Perosites is a promontory about the farthest part of Moscouy, neare the Scythian sea, where liueth (as Cellarius reports of Asia in his great booke entituled Speculum orbis terrarum, and Mercator in his world-map) a certaine people which haue so small a vent for their mouth, that they are nourished onely by the sauour and steeme of sodden flesh. And about this promontory the Riuer Ob, rising from the lake of Kythay, groweth to an huge breadth, and so emptieth into the Scythian or frozen sea. The Baron of Herbestoin noteth it in his map of Moscouie, and in his Historie saith as much as here followeth touching this riuer, fol 82. They that haue beene thereon say they haue laboured a whole day without ceasse, their vessell going very fast, to passe the Riuer, and that it is fourescore Italian miles broad Which ageeth well with that the Poet here saith, and with report of Merator and Cellarius: so that by good right it may be called, rather then any other streame, the king of all fiesh waters, because in all the world besides there is none so large, and this also is of a wonderfull great length: for as the foresaid Baron affirmeth, from the one end to the other, to wit, from the lake of Kythay to the frozen-sea, it asketh more then three moneths sayling.
The realme and citie of Malaca are described in the sixth booke of the Portugall historie, chap. 18. It is neare the Equinoctiall aboue Taprobana: so therefore Asia reacheth from the North-pole beyond the Equator.
The Isles from whence are brought buge masses of Cloues and Cassia, are the Moluckes, siue in number, Tidor, Terenat, Motir, Machian, and Bachian, beset with diuers other Isles and Islets vn ler and neere the Equator in the East, which with their properties and manners of their inhabitants are well set downe in the 13. booke of the history of Portugall, Chap. 8.
Samotra, whereon passes the night-equalling line, or the Equator, is the Isle Taprobana Southward ouer against Malaca: it is aboue 450. leagues long, and 120. broad, I haue described it in the fist day of the first weeke: see further the history of Portugall in the sixt booke, the 18. chap.
Zeilan is an Isle right against the Cape of Calecut, aboue Taprebana toward the East, it lies North and South, in length about 125. leagues, and in the broadest place is 75. ouer. There are taken out of the sea great store of [Page 92] pearles very faire and brighte for the further description thereof, see the 4. booke and 20, chapter of the history of Portugall.
Bisnagar is a kingdome lying betweene Decan and Narsingua, the mountaines of Calecut, and the sea called the great gulfe of Bengala. It is rich in gold which is there found in riuers. Looke the situation thereof in the Map of the East Indies, and in the Asia of Ortelius and Cellarius.
The Pont-Eusine, is now called the Maior or the Hacke Sea: at the one end thereof toward the Midland-sea is Constantinople, the Card-men call it by diuers names, which Orteliu: hath set downe in his Synonym.
By the Brother waues of those Chaldean streames, is meant (as. I suppose) the Persian sea, whereinto Euphrates and Tygris both together empty, being before ioined about Babylon, now called Bagadet, and so the Poet takes as much of the breadth of Asia at the West end as he doth at the East: the one from Quinsay to Chiorze, the other from the sea of Constantinople to the Persian Gulse.
Concerning the straight of Anion, the Cardmen are not all of one opinion: Mercator, Ortelius, Cellarius, Theuet, and others, set downe plainly a good broad arme of Sea betwixt the North-east point of Asia and America. But Vopelius ioynes Asia and this fourth part of the world together, greatly enlarging Asia and cut tolling the other, contrary to the opinion of the Authors aforesaid, and many Spaniards that haue written of the new-found world: the reasons that may be alledged in fauour of either side, require a large Commentary. Vopelius his opinion indeede cutteth off many doubts that arise about the enpeopling of America: but Mercator and the others, who are most commonly followed, seeme to ground more vpon Geography and better to agree with the seas naturall sway and easie compassing the earth. Arias Montanus in his booke intituled Phaleg, where he treateth of the habitations of Noes posteritie, setteth downe a Map according to Vopelius, this booke of his bound in the volume called Apparatus, is ioyned with the great Bibles of Antwerp. But the Poet followeth Mercator, Ortelius, and the common opinion of the Cardmen of our time: for Ptolome, Strabo and Mela in their daies had not discouered so much.
Quinsay, which the Poet cals Quinzit, is a famous citie in the Northeast point of Asia about ten leagues from the sea, built vpon peeres and arches in a marrish ground; it is twenty leagues or one hundred miles about, and by reason as well of the great Lake-waters there, as also of the ebbe and slow of the sea, it bath (as M. P. Venet, reports in the 64. chapter of his second booke) 12000. bridges of stone: the most renoumed bound-marke of all Asia, and the greatest citie in the world, if that be true. But Theuet gainsaith it in the 27. chapter of the 12. booke of his Cosmography, where he describes the Citie and Lake with the Riuer that causes the Lake to swell; he saith it is not aboue foure leagues in compasse: yet M. Paule affirmes he hath beene there.
Chiorze is another worthy part of Asia set downe here for a bound-marke, because of the strange Buls there, as great as Elephants, with haire as smooth and soft as silke. Howsoeuer now adaies that country is nothing so ciuill as [Page 93] others inhabited by the posterity of Cham and Iaphet, yet the fruitfulnesse of the ground, and great commodities there growing, for maintainance of mans life, declare it hath beene in times past one of the best portions of the children of Noe.
7. Ashur t' Assyriland. Moses saith the sonnes of Sem were Elam, Ashur, Arphaxad, Lud and Aram: The Poet here in six verses hath noted out the first habitations of these fiue: reseruing afterward, about the 300. verse and so forth, to shew their first, second, third, and fourth out-going ouer the rest of Asia. Concerning Ashur it may be gathered out of the 10. of Genesis, verse the 11. that hauing sorted himselfe with the people that now began to feare Nimred, and liking not to liue vnder that yoke, went on further, and in the Countrey after his name called Assyria built Niniuy (which a long time remained one of the greatest Cities in the world, as appeares by the prophesie of Ionas and other places of Scripture) and Caleh and Resen not farre asunder, which haue beene long agoe destroyed, Elam, that was the eldest, seated himselfe by the riuer Euphrates neere the Persian Gulfe, which now is called the Sea of Mesendin. The Poet giues him a Princely title, because the Monarchie began betime and long continued thereabouts, where also reigneth still the Sophi, a great Emperour and deadly enemy of the Turkes. The Riuer Araxes is described by Ptolome in his third Map of Asia, where he makes it spring from the soot of Pariard which some men take for the hill Taurus, and so passing Scapene, Soducene, and Colthene to emptie into the Caspian sea. These Countries are very rich, and therefore the Poet cals them sat lands. Lud hauing passed the Riuer composed of Tygris and Euphrates, which straight after voids into the Golfe, had Elam on the North, the two Riuers ioyned and the Gulfe on the East, and on the West the Marches of Seba, which is the vpper part of Arabia. The poet here allotteth him the Lydian fields, if by Lydia be vnderstood that part of the lesser Asia called Meonia by Ptolome, Herodote and Plinie, Lud should haue wandered further then the other foure brothers. Moses reports not any thing of his Colonies, and his farre going may be the cause, for according to the Poet he should haue coasted vp as farre as Aeolia and the Midland sea. The seat of Aram is Mesopotamia, to wit, the Countries about Babylon, and the mountaines of Armenia, which were after called by the name of Taurus. This also containeth Syria and the great Armenia, betwixt the which runneth Euphrates. Arphaxad passing Euphrates staied in Chaldea: and for that Astronomy and other excellent arts there chiefly flourished, the Poet surnameth him the Learned, which appertaineth also vnto him in regard of the true doctrine maintained by his posteritie, and after some corruption reformed in the house of Abraham, whom the Lord remoued from Vr of the Chaldeans into Syria.
8. Cham. The share of Cham was Africke, which the Poet boundeth out as followeth. It hath on the Southside the Ae [...]hiopicke Ocean, or the sea of Guinea, the land of Negros, the realmes of Caefala (which commeth neere the South Tropicke, and is right-ouer against Madagascar, or as the Spanish call it, the Isle of S Laurence) Bolongas (lower and hard by the Cape of good hope) Guagamet, about the lake of Zembre, from whence the riuer Nile springeth, as Daniell Cellarius noteth in his Map of Africke; and Benin, that Ises aboue th'Equator neere the great bay betwixt Meleget and Mauicongo. As for Concritan, it is a great wildernesse betweene Cefala and Bolongas, which by reason of extreame heare brings forth great store of poisonous things. Now the Northbound of Affricke is the Midland-sea, and on the West it shooteth out three capes or promontories named in the text, all toward the Atlanticke Ocean, but the greene cape; which is more southward and pointeth more toward the Sea, called (in respect of the Antatticke pole) the North Sea, though it lye very neere the Equator: on the East of Affricke plaies the Arabian Gulfe, and the great red Sea now called the Indicke Ocean: and beyond these bounds the Poet saith Cham also possest Arabia, which is distinguished into three parts, the Happy, the Desert, and the Stony, all enclosed by the Mount Libanus, and the Red and Persian Gulfes.
9. Canan. He setteth downe briefly and in foure verses the seuerall abodes of Chams foure sonnes, according as they are named in the tenth chapter of Genesis. Chus the eldest brother had Aethiopia, which some take for that vnder Aegypt, others for the land of Chus which is a part of Arabia the [Page 94] Happy, as may be gathered by many places of the old Testament, well noted of M. Beroals in the sixt chapter of his fourth booke of Chronicles. Mizraim peopled Aegypt, that of the Hebrewes was commonly called Mitzraijm, and long after Aegypt of the name of King Aegyptus, who succeeded Belus in that kingdome, and was brother to Danaus, who came into Greece and was Author of that name generall to the Grecians, which, as Saint Augustine thinkes De Ciu. Dei, the eighteenth booke and tenth chapter, happened about the time of Iosua. Phut the third sonne of Cham, gaue name (saith Iosephus) to the Phutaeans, after called Lybians, of one of the sonnes of Mesren or Mizrain named Lybis. He addeth also that in Mauritania there is [...] certaine riuer and countrey called Phute. Ezechiel 30.5. numbreth Phut among those that were in league with Chus and Lud, which the Latine interpreter translateth Ethiopia, Lydia, and the Lydians: so also did the 70. Interpreters. This I say to mou [...] the Reader, that is so delighted, vnto a further and more diligent search. I thinke Phut was seated neere Arabia and Aegypt; although Arias Montanus and others place him in the coast of Affricke now called Barbary, about Tunis, Bugie, Algeri and the Mountaines of Maroco. Now of Canan or Chanaan, the fourth sonne of Cham, was called that Land of Promise, which the twelue Tribes of Israel vnder the conduct of Iosua in due time entered and possessed. The bounds thereof are plainly set downe in the booke of Exodus, chap 23. verse 31. and elsewhere: I neede not here discourse of them, except I were to write a long Commentarie.
10. Now Japhet. Moses reciting Genesis 9.27. how Noe blessed his two children, sets downe two notable points; the one concerning the great and many Countries which Iaphet and his posteritie should possesse, the other of the fauour that God should shew them, by lodging them in the tents of Sem, that is, by receiuing them at length into his Church; which hath beene fulfilled in the calling of the Gentiles. For the first point, whereas he saith, God enlarge Iaphet (For so the Hebrew word signifieth, although some translate it Persuade) it is as much as if he had said, Let Iaphet and his race possesse the Countries round about him farre and neere. And this hath also beene accomplished in that so infinite a multitude of people hath issued out of the stocke of Iaphet, and peopled Europe; which, though it appeare lesser then the other parts, hath alwayes had more inhabitants, and fewer void Countries: The Poet hath set downe so perfect a description thereof, as it needes no further to be opened, if the Reader haue neuer so little beheld the Maps. On the East it is parted from the greater Asia by the Maior Sea, the Meotis Lake called by Ortelius the Zabach sea, the Riuer Tane or Deu, which voids into the Lake, and the Spring-herds of Rha, Edel, or Volga, running by Tartarie into the Caspian Sea: and from Asia the lesse, sometime the honour of the world & exceeding rich, as still it hath sufficient, it is deuided by the Straight of Gallipoli, sometime called Hellespont. On the West it hath the Straight of Gibraltar, the Spanish and Brittish Oceans: on the North the Frozen Sea, and on the South the Midland Sea, which is diuersly called, to wit, the Sea of Marseil by the coast of Genes, the Adriaticke about Athens and Morea, and [Page 95] otherwise according to the places adioyning. This goodly part of the world, beside the Romaine Empire, hath many great kingdomes full of people, well set forth by the Card-men. Daniell Cellarius accounts it in length, from Lisbon to Constantinople, about six hundred leagues Almaine, and very neere as much in breadth from Scrifinie to Sicily.
11 Gomer. Moses reckeneth seuen sonnes of Iaphet, Gen. 10.2. So doth here the Poet, not standing much vpon the order of them, to follow the verse; of Gomer are come the Gomerites, whom the Greekes called Galates and Gaules: of them came the people that spoiled Delphos, and then sate downe about Troas in Asia, and were called Gaule-Greekes, or Asian Galates, who afterward seized a good part of Phrygia. The Lord threatning by Ezechiel, 38. Chapter; Gog, chiefe of the Princes of Mesech and Tubal, saith he, will destroy him with this Gomer and all his bands, and the house of Togarmah, of the North-quarters. They that expound the Prophesie, gather out of this place that the Gomerites were people bordering on the North of Asia, and brought by the Kings of Syria and Asia to destroy the Iewes after their returne from Babylon. They preased forth of Asia and enlarged their dominions greatly (as hath beene said) for they were a very warlike Nation. Of them, the Poet saith, are come the Germanes, so Melancthon affirmeth vpon Carion, so doe others also, and chiefly Goropius in his fift booke. But there is great diuersitie in these outworne matters, betweene the late and ancient Writers. A diligent conference of places in the old Testament, and the ancient Latine, Greeke, and Chaldean translations serue best for [Page 96] the purpose: next, a carefull examining of the best Greeke and Latine Histories: but this requires a whole volume, whereunto the searches of Goropius, being so well handled, might afford a man great helpe. Concerning Tubal, the Poet followes the opinion of Iosephus, that he was Author of the Spanish: which must be rightly vnderstood, that is, after a long tract of time. For by the 38. and 39. of Ezechiel, it seemes that the people issued from Tubal & Mosoch, which were neighbours, dwelt neare Arabia, and were gouerned or led to war by the Kings of Asia and Syria. And in the 32. chap. where is mention made of the mourning that should be among the Nations for the King of Aegypt, there are named among others, Ashur, Elam, Mosoch and Tubal: whereby it may be gathered they were of Asia. As for their Colonies and outcreases into Spaine, they are very darke and hardly proued. Vasaeus indeed in his Chronicle of Spaine, and Taraphe in his Historie, and others that haue written of Spaine in diuers languages, following Ioseph and Berose, make Tubal first King of Spaine: but sithence they declare not what time he came thither, I leaue the Reader to consider of, and search further into the matter. Looke the historicall Library of N. Vignier, the first part, page 15. where he treateth of the people of Europe.
Magog, as the Poet saith, is father of the Scythians: his first habitation and Colonie was in Coelesyria, as may be gathered out of the fift booke and 23. chapter of Plinie, and the 37, 38, and 39. chapters of Ezechiel. At this time the right Scythians are the Selauonians, Moscouites and Tartarians, who vaunt of their descent from Iaphet. This might haue beene by tract of time, but not so soone, as the Poet in the sequele. Melancthon in his first vpon Carion takes the prophecies against Gog and Magog to be meant especially of the Turkes, whom he calleth by the name of Scythians, and applieth also vnto them that which is written in the Reuelation. And in the end of his second Booke he giues the name to all people that professe Mahomet. I thinke my selfe, that, some while after Noes partition of the lands, Magog and his people dwelt in Coelesyria, or there abouts, and thence by succession of time thrust vp into the higher Countries. Now as the ancient people of God were much vexed and outraged by the Kings of Syria and Asia, successours of Seleucus Nicanor, and signified by the name of Gog, who aiding the people of Magog, Mosoch and Tubal, their subiects, greatly annoyed the Iewes then returned from Babylon: so hath Satan in these later daies against the [Page 96] holy Citie, the Church of God, stirred vp againe Gog and Magog, many Kings and Princes enemies to the Faith, who haue conspired together, and made a League to ouerthrow it vtterly: but the Almightie in due time and season shall confound them. Reade the 20. Chapter of the Reuelation, and the 89. Sermon of Bullinger thereupon.
As for Mosoch, Ioseph saith, of him are come the Cappadocians, and for proofe thereof, alledgeth a certaine Towne of their Country called Mazaca. It may be gathered out of the 120. Psalme, that Mesech, or Mosoch, was a neighbour people to Syria and Arabia, which place the Chalde Paraphrast expounding, vseth words of this import: O wretch that I am! for I haue beene a stranger among the Asians, and dwelt in the Arabian tents. The Poet considereth what might haue beene in continuance of time, and how farre the mans posterity might haue stretched.
Madai sure was Author of the name of Medes, whose Empire was very great in the higher Asia; they destroyed the Chaldean Monarchie, as may be noted out of Ierem. 51.11. & Dan. 5.18.
The Thracians ( Ioseph saith, and the Poet) are descended of Thyras. Melancthou thinkes that of him are come the Russians, but the Scripture speaketh not of his posteritie. Plinie makes mention of a Riuer Tyra in the Russian or European Sarmatia: Melancthon, Goropius and others call it Nester. Goropius in his seuenth Booke puts the Getes, Daces and Bastarnes among the Thracians, as all of one stocke, and speaking almost the selfe-same tongue, which also (as he saith) comes very neare the Cimbricke and Brabantish.
Iauan, the fourth sonne of Iaphet, gaue names to the Ionians, who after with their neighbours were called Greekes: and therefore the Latine Interpreter, translating the place of Ezech. 27.19. for the Hebrue Iauan hath put Graecia: so haue the seuenty put [...], which is the name of Greece, for the same word. As also in the 13. verse of the same Chapter, and in the 19. of the 66. of Esay, they both haue translated the Hebrue Jeuanim [...] & Graeci. The Country of Athens hath in old time beene called Ionie, as Plutarch saith in the life of Theseus, and Strabo in his ninth Booke recites out of Hecataeus, that the Ionians came out of Asia into Greece. Now the Greekes as they were great discoursers, they haue deuised a thousand tales of their first beginning: but I let them passe, because my notes are already waxen ouer long.
12 Now. The like is seene in many bookes of late times and ancient, that treat of the Kingdomes, Countries, and people of the world: for many labour more to come neare Noes Arke, and to finde there the foundation of their Townes, and names of their first Princes, then about other more certaine and sure grounds. And they had rather forge names, and deuise matter of their owne head, than leaue to packe huge volumes full of tales, witnessing the strange vanity of mans braine. The Poet condemnes this foolish ambition, and by good [...]ght: all the matter, when it is at the best, being very doubtfull and vnprofit [...]ble: for man was placed on the earth to thinke rather on the seruice of God, than so to trouble his head with curious out-search of his ancestors names.
13 Of that suppos'ed Berose. Who so desires to know that the Berose late printed is false, supposed, and cleane contrary to the right Chaldean, cited [Page 97] often by Ioseph in his Antiquities against Apion, let him reade the fourth booke of Goropius his Origines Antuerpianae. And so let him thinke also of Manetho, Metasthenes, Fabius Pictor, Sempronius, Myrsilus Lesbius and others packt, as they are, into one volume, by some one that thought to doe great matters by abusing so the Readers, and holding them in amuse by false deuises from further search of the truth. I will not here set downe the words of Goropius, who at large discouers the forgednesse of this new Berose and his followers: let it suffice to haue pointed at the place. The true Berose was one of the Priests of Bel, and at the commandement of Antiochus the third, who succeeded Seleucus, wrote three bookes of the Chaldean Historie: so saith Tatianus, Ioseph, and Clemens Alexandrinus. Some fragments of his we reade in Ioseph against Apion, and they make flat against that other Berose published in our time.
14 Th'Allusion. They that in our time haue entreated of the Nations pedegrees, haue much stood vpon the resemblance that one word or proper name hath to another, and haue aptly framed coniectures of good import and likely-hood, as man may note in Carion, Melanc [...]hon, Peuter, Althamer, Lazius, Goropius, and others. But the Poet holds that a simple resemblance of words is no good ground for a story. His reasons are, first, that hilles, riuers and seas change their names, as by Ortelius his treasure of Geographie doth appeare, comparing the bookes and tables of Ptolomie, Strabe, Mela, and other ancients, with the maps of Gemma Frisius, Vopelius, Mercator, Postel, Theuet, Cellarius, and other late Writers. Secondly, that Cities and Countries are not alwaies called by the names of their founders and first inhabitants. Thirdly, that no stocke or Nation hath sure hold of any place in the world, because of the many changes that befall this life. Fourthly, that as in the sea one waue thrusteth on another, so the people, and chiefly those of old time, haue driuen each other out of place, and in a manner played In docke, out nettle. All stories prooue these reasons to bee true, and for the last, the Author shewes three notable examples to confirme it.
15 Th'old Britton. It is aboue 1200. yeares agoe since Vortiger King of England, then called Great Brittaine, or Albion, (that is, a white-sand Isle) hauing warre with his neighbours the Scots, sent for aid to the Saxon-English a people of Germany, who, after they had done him good seruice, played as the Turkes did in Greece: for they seated themselues in a part of the Island, on the East, where few yeares after they kept such a coile, that the old Britton, the natura [...]l Inbred of the Countrey, was constrained to forsake it. So with a great multitude passed the sea, and landed in Armoricke, now called little Brittaine: where they gathered more and more together, and increased much by succession of time. See more hereof in the Chronicles of England and Brittaine. The riuer Leyre falls into the trench of Nantes, and so voids into the Ocean.
16 The Lombard. About the yeare of Christ 568. Alboin King of Lombardes hauing heard of the fruitfulnesse of Italy, left Pannonia, or Hungary (where he dwelt) in gard of certaine Hunnes, vpon, conditions, and in few weekes after made a rode into Italy with a mightie armie, and got many Townes chiefly in Insubria, now called Lombardy, of those Lombards, who raigned there about two hundred yeares, till they were ouercome and brought to thrall by the Emperour charlemaine, about the yeare 774. Looke the Histories of France, and the second part of the Librarie of [Page 100] N. Vignier, Ishall speake anon of their beginning more particularly.
17. Th' Aline. About they yeere 412. when Ataulphe King of Gothes had driuen away the Alaines and Vandals from Cordway and Seuill, which they possessed, as also most of the prouinces of Spaine, the Vandals sate downe in Betica, which after was of thir name called first Vandalosie, and then shorter Andalosie: The Alaines in Lusitania and the prouince of Carthage, or (as some say) betwixt the riuers Iberus and Kubricatus, whereabouts in time past dwelt a people called Iacetani, not vnlikely to be the men of Arragon; afterward they ioyned and went both together into Affricke, where they raigned a long time. But in the yeere 534. the Emperour Justinian, who caused the Roman lawes to be gathered together into one body, sent an armie against them vnder the command of Belissarius: he regained Affricke, tooke Carthage, and led Gllimer command of Belissarius: he regained Affricke, tooke Carthage, and led Gllimer king of Goths prisoner vnto Rome. After all this the Romans and the Moores also were constrained to giue place in Affricke to the Arabians, who pressed in there, and encamped themselues in sundry places.
18. This hunger ne're sussiz'd. The Poet saith, that desire of rule, reuenge, and vainglory, ambition and couetousnesse, haue chiefly caused so many people to remoue and change their dwellings. As also many stories of Scripture and others plainly shew. Seneca reckoned diuerse other causes in his booke de Consolatione ad Elbiam, where he saith, The Carthaginians made a road into Spaine, the Greekes into France, and the Frenchmen into Greece. neither could the Pyrene mountaines hinder the Germans passage; ouer wayes vnknowne and vntroad the light-headed people haue caried their wiues and children and ouer-aged parents: some after long wandering vp and downe seated themselnes not according to their free choice, but where they first might, when they waxed weary of trauell: some on other mens possessions s [...]ized by force of armes: some as they sought vnknown places were drowned in the sea: some there sat downe, where they first began to want pro [...]ision. And all for sooke not their countries or sought other for the same causes. Many, after their cities were destroyed by warre, sled from their enemies, and so berest of their owne possessions, were faine to presse vpon other mens: many left their dwellings to auoide the disquiet of ciuill warres: and many to emptie Cities of their ouerceasing multitude: some by pestilence, or the earths often gulsing, or like vnsufferable faults of a bad soyle, were cast forth; and some were ent [...]sed from home by report of a larger and more fruitfull ground: some for one cause, some for another, &c.
19. I doe not speake-of here. The Poet hath Scoenites, which I translate Arabes, because they were a people of Arabia, great robbers and har [...]ers of Aegypt and the coast of Affricke [...] the shopheards Nomades are (as I take them) [Page 101] the Numidians and Moores: or (as some thinke) a kinde of Scythiant. The Hordies are the Tartarians, who liue in the field in chariots and tents. Now the Poet leauing the vncertaine course of these roguing Nations, who haue had no more stay in them then swallowes and other wandring, birds, intendeth to speake of a more warlike people: whereof he alledgeth some notable examples.
20. Right such that Lombard was. He setteth downe much matter in few ords, concerning the Lombards. There are diuerse opinions of their pedegree: Melancthon and Peucer in the third and fourth booke of Carious Chron, hold they dwelt in a Saxonie by the riuer Albis, about where now are the Bishopricks of Meidburg and Halberstad, and a part of the Marquesse of Brandburg; and from thence vnder the conduct of Alboin entred Jtalie, and in the time of the Emperour Iustin the second, seated themselues betweene the Appenine hils and the Alpes, where they began a kingdome. They were called Lombards, either because of their long Ianelines (for thence it seeme are come the names of Halbards and Iauclines de barde) or because they dwelt in a countrey flat and fruitfull, as the Dutch word Bard may signifie. Some otherutho rs count them farre-northerne people, yet shew not their ancient aboad. Ptolomee in the fourth table of Europe deriues them from the countrey of Swaube; as also he noteth in the second booke and 11. chapter of his Geogr. with whom agreeth C. Tacitus in his Histories. But Lazius in the 12. booke of his Migrations of the Northerne people, Vignier in the first part of his Library page 905. and out Poet, here followes the opinion of Paulus Diaconus: they differ not much but onely about the time of their stay, and place of their first aboad. Melancthon and Peucer set them first in Saxonic, Paulus Diaconus, the Poet and others, in Scandinauie, or Schonland, a great nearelsle of the Sound or Baltike Sea, from whence they might come in by the bankes of Albis, all or some of them, and some by the coast of Mekelborg, &c. For Paulus Diaconus, in his first booke second chapter, saith of this people, They encreased so fast in their fore-said Country, that they were faine to part themselues in to three companies, and cast lots, which of them should goe seeke another seat. This I say, to shew the Poets cunning drift, that in so few lines hath set downe matter enough, for any man to write-on whole volumes of bookes. Thus then to follow the Poet, the first notable and fast aboad of the Lombards, who came from the Goths and Vandals, was Schonland, whence a part of them, dislodging vnder the conduct of Ibor and Agio setled in Scoring, which is about the marches of Liuonia and Prussia: and after they had there dwelt certaine yeeres, were constrained by a dearth to seeke further, so as they came to Mauringia, and at length to Rugiland, and the countries neere adioyning, which Paulus Diaconus setteth downe by name. There after the death of their leaders, they chose Agilmond for their king. He had reigned 33. yeeres, when the Bulgares, a neighbour people, assailing them vnawares, slue King Agilmond. After him was chosen Lamisson for King, who to reuenge the death of his predecessour, made warre with the Bulgares, got and held a dart of Pologne: then waxing wearie of that countrey, he led his people toward the Rhine, to the coast of the Countrie Palatine, as Tacitus notes in his [Page 102] second booke of Histories, and Velleius Patere. in the life of Tiberius. About Heidelberg there is a towne called Lamberten, which seemes to make somewhat for the Lombards aboad there: so saith Lazius. But many yeeres after, they coasted backe againe, and dwelt in Moranie, where they warred against the Heru [...]es, Sucues and Gepides. Then went they vp into Hungarie vnder the safe-conduit of the Emperour Iustinian, to whom they paid tribute (as Procopius and Diaconus declare at large.) There had they cruell warre with the Gepides, but at length agreed and ioyned with them; and vnderstanding by the practise of Narses, that Italie was a Countrey much sitting their nature, their King Alboin made a road thereinto, and got Lombardie before called Insubria; there they rested and raigned two hundred yeers, vntill Charles the groat vanquisht them, as is before laid.
21. Such was the Goth. Lazius in the tenth booke of his Migrations, hath handled well and largely the Historie of Gothes, gathered out of Procopius, Iornandes, Tacitus, Claudianus, Olaus Magnus, Eutropius, and many others. I will shut vp all in short, and by way of Paraphrase vpon the Poets verse. The Goths, and Almaine people, had for their first assured seat the Isles of the Sound, or Baltike Sea, and Gothland yet retaines the name of them. In Syllaes time they left these Isles, and came to dwell in Almaine beside the riuer Vistula, now called Wixel. After they had warred there against the Frenchmen, they bent toward Transsiluania, Hangaria and Valachia, where they remained vntill the time of Valentinian, maintaining themselues by force of armes against the Greekes and Romans. Then, for many causes alledged by Lazius, they went forward into Thrace, and there dwelt and became tributaries vnto Valentinian and Valens. Eutropius saith, all went not thither, but a good part of them kept their former place, and the cause of their sundring was a civill disagreement about religion: the one side retaining Heathenisme vnder Athalaricke their King: the other vnder Fridigerne mingling with Christenisme the abhominable heresie of Arrius, which taketh quite away the true religion of Christ: The Arrians drew toward the West, and wore after called Visigothes or Westgothes, the other to the contrary, and were called Ostrogothes or Eastgothes, who out of Thrace moued into Hungarie and the countries adioyning, where they had much adoe with the Romaine Emperours, as Lazius well recordeth: at last they got Sclauonia, and all fort ward vnto the Adriaticke Sea: there growing to a mighty number, they determined to set on Italie vnder the command of Radaguise their King in the time of Theodosius the first, sonne of Arcadius. Their Armie was in number aboue two hundred thousand strong, but by the speciall grace of God they were ouerthrowne, captiued and sold most for ducats a peece, their king slaine, and all scattered into diuers countries; but, in the time of Honorius, Alaricke the king of Westgothes made another voyage, and entting into Italie, asked the Emperour a place to dwell on: hauing obtained the coast that marcheth vpon France, as he was going thitherward with his company vpon Easter day, one of the captaines of Sulico set vpon him, and taking him so at disaduantage, by treason slew a great number of the Goths. They, stirred vp with anger and disdaine of such vnf. ithfull dealing of the Romans, make backe to Rome, waste Italie, and in the moneth of [Page 103] September 1164 beleaguer and take the Citie, and three dayes after depart thence loaden with the spoile. As Alaricke was marching toward Rome, there appeared a reuerend personage vnto him, and aduised him, since he would be counted a Christian, that he should not make such hauocke as he did: whereunto the king answered; it is not my desire to goe to Rome, but euery day [...]m I forced by some one (I know not who) that still cryeth vnto me, Goe on, goe on, and destroy Rome. As the Gothes retired Alaricke dyed, and Athaulph succecded him, who led them backe to Rome againe. So they went through with their saccage, and led away captiue [...]alla Placidia the sister of Honorius, whom Athaulph married. Hee was after slaine of his owne people at Barcelona in Spaine, for seeking peace for his wiues sake with Honorius. The third road they made into Italie was vnder the command o [...] Vidimer: but they were encountred and beaten backe by Glycerius, as Jornandes writeth: and so they pressed againe vpon the French, and Spanish Nations. Afterward the Goths of Sclauonia, weary of easie liuing, got leaue of the Emperour Zeno and entred Italie, and ouercame Odocacer the Exarch of Rauenna, and there held estate for many yeeres. At length about the yeere of Christ 411. in the time of Honorius, they seated themselues in Spaine vnder Alaricke and his successours. Now during the time of their aboad neere the M [...]oticke marshes they had nine kings: while they remained in Gothland (which is now deuided into the East and West Goth [...]e, betwixt Swethland and Norway) they had 8. kings; and 10: about the bankes of Wixel, and in Transsiluania and Sclauonia 26. After that being sundred into Eastgothes and Westgothes, the Eastgothes had in Italy 11. kings from Alarick: to Teias, who with the greater part of his people was ouerthrowne by Narses. The Westgothes in Lion-Gaule, in Languedoc and Guien, had six kings; and the kings of Westgothes in Spaine, from Alaricke in the yeere 411. to Philip that now reigneth, are eight and twenty in number, according to the account to Lazius; who reckoneth also two and thirty kings of Arragon, and two and twenty of Nauarre, vnto the kings father that now is. Of these matters it may suffice to haue touched thus much in a word.
22 Such was the French. To enter into the whole history of the French-men, it was not the Poets meaning, but onely to note briefly the chiefe O [...]troads of this braue Nation, and that within the compasse of two thousand yeares. I will goe no further, but follow the text. The first beginning of the French is diuersly recorded, and all the opinions thereof are well gathered and examined by the Author of the French Antiquities: who in the end sheweth his owne iudgement, and auoucheth it to be very likely, that the land of Gaule (which in old time, besides the Realme of France, did containe also the Low-countries, Germany within Rhine, and Lorraine) was first inhabited by the line of Gomer, hither comming vpon diuers occasions, and increasing more and more with the time: as also by the Germanes a neighbour people: for little could the Rhine hinder the Gaules and Germanes from comming together, but that either, as they preuailed in-strength, might come into others countrey for their better liking. And as the men of Marseil are counted an outcrease of Asia, it is like the rest of the Townes and quarters of France were peopled after the same sort. Amianus [Page 104] Marcellinus liuely painteth out the Gaules in his fifteenth booke. So doth Polybius, Caesar, Diodorus Siculus, Strabo, and others. All agree they were a very warlike people; and their multitude gaue them to thinke vpon such remedie as others had vsed before. Their first outroad, that was of any account, was in the raigne of Tarquinius Priscus, and about the time of the Iewes thraldome in Babylon, some six hundred yeares before the birth of Christ. The Celiae (which were the ancient Gaules) possessed the Countries now called Suisse, Sauoy, Daulphine, Languedoc, Vellay, Viuaretz, Lionnois, Forest, Auuergne, Berri, Limosin, Quercy, Perigort, Xanctoigne, Angulmois, Po [...]ctou, Brettaigne, Anjou, Tourraine, Maine, Perche, Normandie within Seine, the Chartrain, Hurepois, Beaulse, Gastinois, Brie, Champagne, the Duchie and Counte of Bourgongne: their King Ambigat sent forth Sidoveze and Belloveze to seeke other dwelling. Sidoveze taking towards Germanie, left people in Bauaria, Bohemia and Carinthia, and seated himselfe in the point of Europe, toward and beyond the Riphean mountaines. Belloveze a while staying at the foot of the Alpes, was after by the perswasions of a certaine Tuscane, called Arron drawne into Italy, and possessed Insubria. Some of his company seating first among the Pyrene hils, at length entred a part of Arragon, and gaue the name to Portugal. But these were nothing so renowned as the other: who preasing further into Italy, marched vnder Brennus as farre as Clusium, and so to Rome. Of his exploits there Liuie writeth, and Plutarch in the life of Camillus, which was 386. yeares before the comming of Christ. A third company that followed Belleveze, because they would haue roome enough, ouer-ran Slauonia, and maugre all stay entred Hungary, and after many skirmishes departed thence in two bands: the one coasting into Macedonie, the other into Greece, where they made the whole world afraid of them: after they had slaine Plol [...]meus Keraunus, brother to Philadelphus King of Aegypt. Pranses was their King, whom others call Brennus; but was not he that sackt Rome. This man not content to haue obtained a great victory of the Macedonians, and harried their country, presumed so farre as to spoile the Temple at Delphos, whereby himselfe and all his were brought to a miserable end. Neuerthelesse the French that stayed behinde, to guard the Frontiers of the Country, fainted not at the report of these newes, but went to field with 1500. foot, and 3000. horse, ouerc [...]me the G [...]tes and Triballes, and wasted all Macedonie: only through negligence, as they retired loaden with spoile, they were brought to their end. Yet they that remained in Gaule sent forth other companies into Asia: who passed on as far as Bossen and Dardanie, where, by reason of a quarrell that fell betweene them, they sundred themselues. One part of them cast into Thrace, and raigned there a long time: the other setled about where Sauus and Danubius meet, not far from Belgrade. These that remained in Dardanie, when they heard tell of the fruitfull soile of the lesser Asia, went on so far as Hellespont, and there because they were three Companies, they parted Natolia betweene them into three parts. The Trocynes had the coast of Hellespont; the Tolystoboges, Eolide and Jonie (which the Turkes call Quision.) The Tectosages, the country further into the maine land. All that part of Asia which [Page 105] lyeth on this side Taurus, they made their tributary, planting themselues all along the riuer H [...]lys, that parteth Paphlagonia from Syria. That Prouince where the Gaules dwelt in Asia, from their first arriuall to the height of the Romane Empire, retained the name of Gaul-Gre [...]ce, together with that same language which Saint Ierome (six or seuen hundred yeares after) saith was like that he heard spoken in Gaule about the quarter of Treues. Thus concerning the ancient Gaules: no to cleare some few darke words of the Text. The worke of Romulus, &c. He meaneth Rome, builded by Romulus, the most warlike Citie of all the world; and therefore Mars, whom the Painims counted the God of Warre, may be thought the founder of it. Cold Strymon, a riuer parting Macedonie from Thrace, as Plinie saith: and because Thrace is no very warme country, he giueth Strymon the adioint of Cold. The Emathicke fields, to wit, Macedonie, so called of King Emathion, Plinie speakes thereof in his fourth booke and tenth chapter thus, Macedonie, a Comtrie containing an hundred and fiftie Nations, sometime renowned for two Kings (he meaneth Philip and Alexander) and for the Empire of the whole world: it was afore-time called Emathia: which word the Poets, as Virgil and Lucan, doe sometime vse for Thessaly, a Countrie neare Macedonie. Lucan in his very first verse, Bella per Emathios plusquam ciuilia Campos. And Virgil in the end of his second Georgie. [Page 105]
The Pharsalian fields are in Thessaly, as Fliny recordeth in his fourth booke and eight Chapter.
Dindyma. A hill in Phrygia. The Poet calleth it Dindyme chastré, guelt Dindym: because the Priests of Cybele, called Curetes, kept and sacrificed there, and were Eunuches atrired like women. The Poets meaning is, that these Gaules harried also Phrygia, and called the country where they dwelt in Asia, Gaul-Greece, after the name of that from whence they first came, and so planted, as it were, another Gaule in the middest of Asia. What became of their successours in the Romanes time, because the Poet makes no mention thereof, I passe it also.
23 Of people most renowàd. He sheweth in few words wherefore he thrusteth no further into discourse of the out-roads the people made in old time. For though Carion, Melancthon, P [...]ucer, Lazius, Rhenanus, Goropius, and others of our time, haue that way farre ventured, and some-while with very good successe; yet it cannot be denied, but that they leaue many doubts, and doe not all-where cleare the matter. See then how fitly the Poet addes that followeth.
24 It shall suffice. The Poet hath heretofore compared Antiquity (chiefly concerning the Nations Out-roads) vnto a great forrest, wherein the cunningest guides haue often lost themselues. Now therefore he saith it is the safer way to follow and keepe neare the verge of the forrest, rather than venter too farre into it. He shewes thereby, that his meaning is to giue vs a generall view of these matters, not curiously to minse the particulars, as they haue done, who vndertake to gather out of Authors, and teach others the course of Noes posteritie euery mile, as they haue runne vntill this present; and pore still into the Arke, to finde there the names of their Country-men and ancestors. Therefore he voweth to rely wholly vpon the golden mouth of Moses, which was the sonne of Amram, as the Scripture witnesseth, [Page 109] Numb. 26.59. Now Moses saith, Gen. 10. in the end of the Chapter, That of the children of Noe were the Nations diuided on the earth after the Floud. And before in 5.20. and 30. verses, he sheweth plainly from whence they began to people the world, and (as it were) to lead againe the Arke ouer the face of the earth: in filling most countries of the world with their great posteritie, encreased, as it was, by vertue of Gods wonderfull blessing, Gen. 9.1. Encrease and multiply, and fill the earth.
25. Yet not as if Sems house. He saith Sem peopled not the East all at once, but by succession of time; that Iaphet when he came out of the Arke, did not forthwith runne to Spaine, nor Cham to hide himselfe in the furthest part of Affrick: but that by little and little, and in processe of time their issues [Page 110] ranged so farre forth either way. He speaketh of diuers Countries far vp in the East, and farre downe Southward, the site whereof appeareth plaine in the Mappes: and to emich this true story, he vseth two prettie comparisons, of the rockes of Bees in Hybla, and Elmes in an Island: and as by their surci ease both places are by peecemeale at length quite ouergrowne, so (he saith) the world by yearely encrease of Noes posteritie was part after part ouer-peopled as it is. First after the confusion of tongues they lodged one behinde another, about the coast of Mesopotamia: afterward as they encreased in stocke, their new families passed the riuers hilles and straights, looking-out other dwelling places to their liking: the prouidence of God directing all (as appeares) for the better grace and trimming of the earth, and the commoditie of all manking.
26. And hence it comes to passe. This ensueth necessarily of that goes before. Where the posteritie of Noe were most together in the beginning, there we must confesse was the chiefe sway and greatnesse of mankind, and that was in Assyria and Chaldea, as Moses witnesseth, Gen. 11. whereout the Poet concludeth as afore: see further, Gen. 14. Concerning the Kings wars that are there named, with their countries marching vpon Tigris or there abouts; and of Nymrod it is namely said that the beginning of his raigne was Babel, &c. in the Countrey of Sennaar, marching vpon the riuer Tygris.
27. For Babylon betimes. Hauing spoken in generall of the first peoples greatnesse, hee specifieth now the first Monarchie; whereof it seemes Meses hath enough written in the tenth chapter aforesaid. Now the best Authors many, of these and the former times, declare and proue by the account of yeares that the first Monarchie as in Babylon, and Babylon was in Chald [...]a: whereupon some dispute for Nimnie and Assyrians, and some because these two great Cities began about one time, had seuerall Princes, and raigned both many hundred yeares, they make a double Monarchie of the first, vntill such time as the Chaldean had swallowed the Assyrian. I take not the word Monarchie too precisely, as if in the time of the Babylonian there were none other in the world. Aegypt began in good time to be of power, and great Kings there were in the Land of Canaan, and the countries adioyning. But I vnderstand with our Poet that the first rule plainly appeared at Babylon, euen in the time of Noe. Hee that would vpon this point compare prophane Histories with the Scripture, might sinde matter for a long discourse, the summe whereof may be seene in Funccius, Carion, Vignier and other Chroniclers. To be short, I say the raigne of Nymrod mentioned, Gen. 10.10. many yeares fore-went all other wee reade of, and especially those of the Greekes, Romanes, Gaules, &c. as is proued plainly by the account of time. Thebes, a Towne of Boeotia in Greece: it hath a spring by it called Dirce, whereof the Towne-selfe among the Poets is often surnamed. Amphion, a wise Polititian, who by his eloquence and sleight perswaded the people of those times, rude as they were and vnciuill, to ioyne together in building the walles of Thebes; whereupon the Poets, to shew the force of eloquence, faine that Amphion by the cunning stroakes of his Lute [Page 111] made the stones to come downe from the rockes and lay themselues together in order of a wall. And thus saith Horace in his Epistle of Poetrie ad Pisones: Dictus & Ampbion Thebanae conditor vrbis Saxa mouere sono testudinis, & piece blanda Read more of him in Appollonius his Argonauticks.
28. The sonnes H [...]ber. This proues againe that the neere successours of Noe silled not the world all at once, but by succession of time. So the true religion remained in the family of Sem: The Chaldeans were excellent Astronomers and Philosophers; the Egyptian Priests knew the secrets of Nature, before there was any knowledge of letters in Greece: which was not peopled so soone as the other by many yeeres, as the histories euen of the Greekes themselues declare. See the latter Chronicles.
29. All Egypt ouershone. Another proofe. If the world had beene peopled all straight after the flood, riches and dainties would haue beene found vsed in all countries at the same time. But they were in Egypt and Tyre long before the Greekes and Gaules knew the world. So it followes that Greece and Gaule were not so soone peopled as Egypt and Phaenicia. By the limping Smith, he meanes Vul an, that first found out the vse and forging of Iron in Sicilie. Prometheus was the first that found the vse of fire among the Argol ans or Greekes. Of him saith Hor. 1. booke 2. Ode. Audax Iapeti genus ignem sraude malâ gentibus intulit. That is, the bold sonne of Japhet brought fire by craft among the Nations. Of this matter the Poets haue set forth many fables, the true drift whereof our Author sheweth in a word. Looke what I haue noted vpon the 707. verse of the sixt day of the first weeke. The rest of this place is easie to be vnderstood.
30. As is a pebble stone. A fine similitude concerning the aforesaid matter: to shew how all the Arts began from the plaine of Sennaar to spread by little and little ouer all the world.
31. For from Assyria. He beginneth here to treat of the more particular peoplings. And first he sheweth how the posteritie of Sem began to fill Asla. Their first oute-ease, leauing the coast of Assyria, bent toward the East. Of this riuer Hytan, Plinie saith 6.23. Carmaniae slumen Hytanis portuosum & auro fertile. Looke Solinus cha 67. They hauing peopled this quarter, thrust on further toward Oroatis a riuer of Persia: whereof Plinie faith in his 6. booke the 23. Flumen Oroatis oslio dissicili nisi peritis; Insulae 2. paruae: inde vadosa nauigatio palustri similis, per curipos tamen quosdam peragitur, and in the 25 chap. Persidis initium ad Flumen [...]roatin, quo diuiditur ab Elimaide. Read also the 24. chapter of the said booke of Plinie, for the better vnderstanding of their dwelling here. Then they drew further forth into Persia towards the Citie of Susa, close by the which Coaspis runneth: such is the sweetnesse of that water, that (as Plinie, Soline, Plutarch, and others record) the Kings of Persia drinke of none other. So they came into the valleys of the famous hill Caucasus, where dwelt the Parthians, whose Kings were commonly called Arsaces. From hence into Medie, and lastly vp higher toward the Hyrcanian, or Caspian lake. Looke Ptolomie in his first, second and third table of Msia, Mercater, Ortelius, Cellarius and Theuet. All these remoues are contained within the compasse of fiue or six hundred leagues.
32. These mens posteritie. He setteth downe in foure verses the chiefe countries peopled by the second ouercrease of Sems Issue. The land fronting Cheisel is a part of Tartarie, not farre from the Caspian sea, whereinto that riuer falleth, and riseth neere the wildernesse of Lop, aboue Tachaliston; which is a great Countrey neighbour to the mountaine Imáus. Charasse, Charassan, or Chorasan, it is a Countrey that lies betweene Isligias, Bedane and Tacalistan, which I note more particularly then I finde in the French Commentary, because there is so little difference of letters betweene that and the name of Carazan, whereof the Poet speaketh in the fourth verse following. This Charasse, Gadel, Cabul, Bedane and Balistan, are prouinces enclosed by the riuer Indus, the mountaine Imaus, the Caspian Sea, and realme of Persia, a circuit of land somewhat more then 600. leagues.
33 Their of-spring afterward. He commeth to the third ouercrease of the Semites, who went forth Southward as well as North and Eastward. The inhabitants of Cabul thrust forward their Issue toward Bisnagar, a rich countrey of South Asia, lying betweene the Persian sea and the Gulfe of Bengala. Narfinga (for so I haue translated the French Nayarde) is a kingdome lying yet lower, and very rich. That plenteous land that Ganges thorow-flowes, it containes the higher India, where are many wealthy kingdomes set forth well at large in the Maps, as Cambaie, Decan, Bengala, Pedir, &c. Toloman, is further vp toward the North. Aua, is beyond the Gulfe of Bengala, toward the East, about Pegu and Siam, countries of infinite wealth, Mein, on the West hath Ganges, on the East Macin, on the South Bengala, and on the North Carazan, which the Poet surnameth Muskey, because there is great store of the best Muske, Lop, a Desert thirty dayes iourney ouer, lying yet higher Northward. It seemes the Roet followes the opinion of M. P. Venet, who in the first booke of his Tartarian Historie, chap. 35. makes very strange report of the fearefull sights that the poore passengers there meete with, often to the losse of their liues. Not vnlike it is that certaine legions of cuill Spirits there abiding, haue had some speciall power giuen them so to punish the Idolatrous Mahometists, who still inhabit those quarters. The Poet saith all che countries marching this Wildernesse were peopled by this third outerease of the Semits. It is an opinion somewhat likely, and thereon I rest, vntill I heare some other (if it be possible) giue more certaine intelligence of the matter.
34. Long after sundry times. He speaketh of the fourth and last ouercrease of Sem. Tipura, a Countrey breeding many Rhrinocerots, which, according as the Greeke name signifieth, I haue translated horny-snouted beasts: read the description of them in the exposition of the fortieth verse of the sixt day of the first weeke: this Tipura lieth Eastward aboue Toloman betwixt Carazan an Caichin, or Gaucinchine, for so I haue translated: it hath on the West Tipura and Toloman, on the South Campaa, on the North China and Mein, and on the East the East-Ocean: a land very large and bearing great store of Aloës Mangit is farre vp in the North: so is also Quinsai, Ania, and Tabin, one aboue another euen vnto the Anien Straight and Seythicke Ocean. By this description, plaine to be seene in the Maps of Asia, the Poet meant to shew vs [Page 113] all the seuerall remoues of Sems posteritie; who not passing beyond the Anian Straight, might long content themselues with [...]o large a portion as Asia containing aboue foure thousand leagues of ground. As for the particular description of these Countries, their length, breadth and commodities, I neither dare, nor will euer charge therewith my notes enten [...]ed for short. Besides, it was not the Poets minde to hold the Reader long with view and study of such matter and questions, as may be had and plainly resoiled of the Card-men.
35. Now from the center-point. Out of Affyria and Mesopotamia, Iaphet, or the next race from him, drew toward the West, into those places that the Poet names, set downe (as they are) in the ancient and later Maps of Asia and Europe. I neede not mine [...] euery word of the text. Armenis is distinguished into the Great and Lesse, it lieth neere the Caspian sea, and coasteth toward Europe. The sweete Corician caue, it is in Cilicia, and is described of Plinie in the 27. chapter of his 5. booke, and Strabo in his 4. booke, and Solinus in his 51. chapter. Concerning the strange matters which the Poet reports of it, read Pomponius Mela his description of Cilicia, the first booke. Besides many notable properties of the place, he saith moreouer that when a man hath gone there a troublesome narrow way a mile and more, he shall come through pleasant shades into certaine thicke woods, which make a sound (no man can tell how) of certaine country-songs: and after he is passed thorow to the end thereof, he shall enter another deeper shadow, which amazeth much all that come there, by reason of a noise is heard, loud and passing mans power to make, as it were the sound of many Cimbals. These are his words: Terret ingredientes sonitu Cimbalorum diuinitùs & magno fragore crepitantium. He sets downe also at large all other the pleasant delights of the place. Concerning this musicke, some thinke it a fable: others ascribe it to a naturall cause; as that the ayre entting by a natrow mouth into a vault of stone, wide and very deepe, soone growes thereby exceeding raw, and so turnes into water, then dropping still downe in many places and quantities somewhat proportionable vpon the sounding stone, makes in those hollow rockie places a noyse, as it were, musicall. Taure his lostie downes, this great mountaine reacheth hence well toward Pisidia Westward, and on the other side a great way into Asia, as Ptolomee sheweth in his first table. Meander a riuer arising out of the mountaines of Pelta and Totradium in Asia the lesse, runneth thorow Hierapolis, P [...]sidia, Licaonia, Caria, and other countries thereabouts, into the Midland sea. Illios or Troas, Bithynia and the rest, are higher toward Hellespont and the Maior sea.
36. Then boldly passing ore. He spake before of Illios, which lies in low Phrigia vpon the shore of the Midland sea, about the Sigean Peake and the riuer Sin Sis, hard by the Straight of Gallipolie, where Abydos on Asia-side standeth, and Sestos on the side of Europe: now he saith the second ouercrease of Semites past the Straight, it being in breadth but the fourth part of a league, as Bellon nuoucheth in the second booke and third chapter of his Singularities. In times past there stood two towers, one in Sest, the other in Abyde, in the tops whereof wont to be set great lights to waine the marrinets by night. Looke what [Page 114] we haue noted vpon the word Phare in the first day of the first weeke, verse 448. and what vpon the word Leander, first weeke, fift day, 912. verse. At this time Sest and Abyde are two Castles, where the Turke hath Garrisons, and are the very keyes of Turkie in that quarter: so neare is Constantinople vnto them. Strimon, Hebre and Nest, are three great riuers passing thorow Thrace (which is now called Romania) and [...]alling into the Aegean sea, called now by some Archipelago, and by the Turkes the white sea. Looke the ninth table of Europe in Ptolomee. The Rhodopean dales. Rhodope is a mountaine bounding Thrace: in the dales thereof, beside other Townes, are Philippoli and Hadrianopoli. Danubie or Donaw is the greatest riuer of all Europe, springing out of Arnobe hill, which Ptolomee and Mercator puts for a bound betweene the Sweues and Grisons: this Riuer running thorow Almaine, Austria, Hungaria, Slauonia, and other countries with them interlaced, receiueth into it aboue fifty great Riuers, and little ones an infinite sort, so emptieth by six great mouthes into the Maior sea. Moldauia, Valachia, and Bulgaria, are the countries neare about the fall of Danubie.
37 Thrace. These countries neare the Maior and Aegean Seas, and the Thracian Bosphore, thrust on the third ouercrease of people further West and Northward, as the Poet very likely saith: the Maps of Europe shew plainly the coasts he nameth for their chiefe seats. But to shew how and when they changed and rechanged places and names of places, driuing out one the other, and remouing by diuers enterspaces, it were the matter of a large booke.
38 Now turning to the South. He commeth now to handle the Colonies, or ouercreases of Chams posteritie: first in Arabia, Phaenicia, and Chananaea, which was after called Iudea: the site of these countries wee know well: they are easie to be found in the generall Maps, and those of Europe, beside the particulars in Ptolomce and other late Writers, as namely in the Theater of Ortelius. When the Chamites had ouerbred Arabia, and the countries South from Chaldaea, which lies betwixt the Arabian and Persian Gulfes, they went at the second remoue downe into Aegypt betwixt the red and Midland seas: thirdly, they entred Affrick, and by little and little filled it. The Poet points out many countries, for better vnderstanding whereof, wee must consider that Affrick (the fourth part of the world knowne) is diuided into foure parts, Barbaria, Numidia, Lybia, and the Land of Negroes. Barbaria containeth all the North coast, from Alexandria in Aegypt to the Straight of Gibraltar along by the Midland sea, and is diuided into foure Kingdomes, Ma [...]oco, Fessa, Tremisen, and Tunis, containing vnder them 21. Prouinces. Vnder the same Southward lieth Numidia, called of the Arabians Biledulgerid, and hauing but few places habitable. Next below that is Lybia, called Sarra, as much to say as Desert, a countrie exceeding hot, marching athonside vpon the Land of Negroes: that, the last and greatest part of Affricke reacheth South and Eastward very farre. In the further coast thereof is the countrie of Za [...]zibar, certaine kingdomes and deserts neare the Cape of good hope, which is the vtmost and Southerest peake of all Affrick. Cor [...]ne is neare Aegypt. The Punick Sea, the Sea of Carthage, put for the Midland that [Page 115] parteth Europe and Affrick asunder. Fesse, is the name of the chiefe Citie of that Realme in Barbarie. Gogden, a Prouince of the Negroes, as are also Terminan, Gago and Melli, neare the same. Argin, lieth neare the White Cape. Gusola is one of the seuen Prouinces of Maroco in Barbarie. Dara, a country in the North-west of Numidia, not farre from Gusola. Tembuto, agreat countrie in the West part of the Negroes, neare about the Riuer Niger. So is Gualata, but somewhat higher and right against the Greene Cape. Mansara (which I haue put in for the verse sake, as I left out Aden) it lies neare Melli vpon the lowest mouth of Niger. By Aden, that the French hath, I take to be meant Hoden, which is betwixt Argin and Gualata, or somewhat lower. The Wilde [...]nesse of Lybie is surnamed Sparkling, because the sands there ouerchafed with a burning heat of the Sunne, flye vp and dazle mens eyes. Cane, Guber, Amasen, Born, Zegzeg, Nubie, Benim: all are easie to be found in the Mappe neare about the Riuer Niger, sauing Benim which is lower by the Gulfe Royall, and Nubie higher toward Nilus. Amas [...]n (which I haue added) is a great countrie, neare the place where Niger diueth vnder the Earth. From these quarters South and Eastward lies the great Ethiopia, a countrie exceeding hot, sandie, and in many places vnhabitable, because of the sands, which by the wind are so moued and remoued oftentimes, that they ouer-heate and choke-vp diuers great countries, that might otherwise be dwelt in. There the great Negus, called Prester-Ian, raigneth farre and neare. His Realmes, Prouinces, Customes, Lawes, Religion, and the manner of his peoples liuing, are set forth at large by Franciscus Aluares, is his Historie of Ethiopia, that is ioyned with Iohannes Leo his description of Affrick.
39 If thou desire to know. Hitherto the Poet hath told vs how Asia, Europe, and Affricke, were peopled by the successours of Noe. But he hath not shewed how the Iaphethites from Chaldaea got vp to the furthest Northerne parts: and that he now goeth about, and doth in sixteene verses: supposing them from Euphrates to coast vp to the mountaines of Armenia, and so to enter Albania and the neighbour places, from thence to people Tartaria, Moscouia, and all the North Countries, they are plainly set downe by Mercator, Ortelius, Theuet and others in their Maps of Europe: and I thought good, for causes often afore-told, not here to entreat of them particularly. There is left vs yet to consider two notable questions concerning these outroades and Colonies of Noes posteritie. The one, how they came vnto the West Jndia, which hath so lately, within these hundred yeares, beene discouered. The other, how it came to passe that so few of them, in the short space of some hundreds of yeares, were able to encrease to such a number, as might empeople and fill so many huge and diuers countries of the world. The Poet straight makes answer hereunto. Let vs marke his discourse vpon either the demands.
40 But all this other world. This is the first of the foresaid questions: how it came to passe that the new world, discouered in these latter times, could be so replenished with people, as the Spaniards (who haue thereof written very much) did finde it. He speaketh of the West India, which is called another world, or the new world, for the hugenesse thereof; being more then 9300. leagues about, as Gomara saith in his Indian Historie 1. book. 12. chap. it is longer then all the other three parts of the world: and two or three waies as broad as Asia and Europe laid together. This quarter, so great and full of kingdomes and people, if it haue been long agone inhabited, how hap (saith our Poet) the Perstans, Greeks, and Remans, who vndertooke so many far voyages came neuer there, nor once heard thereof? For Ptolomee, Strabo, Mela, and other ancient writers make no mention of it: and if it were peopled but of late yeares, he asketh, how came so many people there, so many great Cities and stately monuments, as Gomara, Benzo, Cieque, Ouiede, Cortes, and others write of. Benzo and Barthelemi de las Casas doe report, that, in that little the Spaniards haue there gotten within these thirtie or fortie yeares, they haue slaine aboue twentie millions of people, vndone and brought to great distresse as many or more, and wasted and vnpeopled twice as much ground as is contained in Europe, and a part of Asia to that. Neuerthelesse in many places, and euen in Mexico, New Spaine and Peru, where they haue vsed all [Page 118] the crueltie, wickednesse and villanie that mans heart or the deuils rage could imagine, there are yet liuing many thousand Indians. Concerning the ancient Monuments of this new world, I will reckon at this time but one of them, taken out of the fourth booke and 194. chapter of Gomara: There are (saith he) in Peru two great high-wayes, [...]eaching the one thorow the hilles, the other ouer the plaines, from Quito to Cusco, which is aboue fiue hundred leagues out-right, a worke so great and chargeable, that it is well worthy noting: that ouer the plaines, is 25. foot broad, and walled on either side, and hath little brookes running along in it, with store of the trees called Molli planted on the bankes. The other is of like breadth, cutting thorow the rockes, and filling vp the lower grounds with stone worke: for they are both of them leuell without mounting or descending any hill, and straight without stopping at any lake or poole. In a word, whosoeuer hath seene either of them, will say it is a worke farre surpassing all the great buildings and paued causies of the Romanes, or the walles of Babylon built by Queene Semyramis, or those most wonderfull Pyramides of Aegypt. Guaynacapa, a certaine King of the Indians (who liued about an hundred yeares agoe) caused these waies to be repaired and enlarged; but he was not the first beginner of them, as some would make vs beleeue: for he could not haue finished them in all his life-time, and the stone-worke [Page 119] semes to be much more ancient. There are built vpon them a daies iourney asunder, many goodly Pallaces, called Tambos, wherein the Court and armies of the Princes wont to lodge. But, Gomara saith, our Spanyards haue by their ciuill warres vtterly destroyed these causies, and cut them asunder in many places, that they might not come one to another: yea the Indians themselues haue broke off and seuered their parts in time of warre. Now let vs heare the Poets answer.
41 What then alas? belike. His first answer is, that the people of the West-Indies fell not out of the ayre, as many little frogs doe in a warme shower, framed, by the vertue of the Sunne, of the dust or vapours arising out of the earth: nor that they grew not out of the ground, like roots or plants: nor by any strange or vaine inchantment, as of the Serpents teeth sowne by Cadmus, the Poets faine, grew souldiers in compleat harnesse. But these they are men well-featured, stout, and long-liuing, chiefly in the North and South-parts of the Country, where both men and women in stature, strength, and continuance, farre excell the people of Europe, Asia, and Affricke. The commodities they haue for health, their meat, drinke and dwelling, their ceremonies, ciuill gouernment and other properties, duly noted by the Historians, make very good proofe of the Poets saying.
42 Indeed this mightie ground. This new-found world is called America, of the name of Americus Vespusius, a certaine famous Pilot of Florence, one of the first discouerers of the Countrey, not much more than an hundred yeares agoe. His second answer is, that this part of the world could not be so soone inhabited as the other three: because it is discoasted further from the plaine of Sennaar, for in Asia the plaine it selfe was. And Arabia being peopled, Affrick was very neare at hand, and Europe from the lesser Asia is parted but with a narrow Phare: whereas America is farre beyong all these, which way soeuer we coast. He calleth Europe a learned Soyle, tower-bearing, louing-right, for the number of learned men and cunning Artisans, of Kingdomes and States well gouerned, and Fortresses that are there, That after Iupiter his deare-beloued hight, lo wit, Europa, that was the daughter of Agenor, King of Phaenicia. For the prophane Poets faine their great god, being in loue with her, to haue taken the shape of a Bull, and on his backe to haue carried her ouer Hellespont, and therefore the place, where he first landed her, was called by her name. From this fable seemes to be drawne the name of Besphore: which is as much to say as Bull-ferry. Perhaps this Iupiter was some notable Pirate or Tyrant there-about raigning, who in a Ship called the Bull, stole away some young Lady, and fled for safetie into Europe. These words (which from cold Bosphors head Doth reach the pearly dow of Tithons saffron bed) set downe the length of Asia, that is, from the Bosphere of Thrace vnto the East-Ocean. The Castile armes and lore: that is, the Spanish Religion and forces, which Christopher Columbus brought first into America, and there planted in the name of the Spanish King.
43 But there the buildings. The third answer is, that the stately buildings, infinite treasures, and diuers gouernments that are there, will witnesse that the country hath beene long inhabited, although hard it is to learne how. [Page 120] I haue already spoke of the great Causeyes of Peru. Now the sumptuousnesse of Themixtetan, the great Citie of the Kingdome of Mexico, and the Kings Pallaces of Peru (such they are described by the Spaniards) make further proofe of the Poets saying. As for the vncountable wealth of the Indies it plainly appeares, that aboue ten thousand millions of gold haue beene brought thence into Europe, beside heapes of Rubies, Emerauds and Pearle, much wracked in the sea, and much brought for a yearely tribute into Spaine. Whereunto I will adde what Franciscus Lopes de Gomara saith concerning the vnualuable riches of Guainacapa, (the name signifieth young and rich) the father of Antibalippa, last King of Peru, whom the Spaniards put to death. All the furniture of his house, table and kitchin (saith he in the 120. chapter of his fourth booke) were of gold and siluer, and the meanest of siluer somewhat embased with copper for the more strength. He had in his Wardrop Giantlike Images of gold liuely featured; as also all kinde of beasts, fowles, trees, herbes, and flowers that the Land there beareth; and all kinde of fishes, that either the Sea there, or any fresh water of his Kingdome breedeth, in the said mettals well and proportianably resembled, not so much as cords, paniers, troughes, billets, and other such implements, but were so; to conclude, there was nothing in his Kingdome, whereof he had not the counfeit in gold or siluer. It is also said that the Kings of Peru, called Ingaes, haue a garden in a certaine Isle neare Puna, where they delight themselues when they list take the Sea, that hath in gold and siluer all herbes, slowers and trees, and other things whatsoeuer meet for a pleasant garden: such a sumptuous deuice, as neuer was heard-of, or seene elsewhere. Besides all this, that King, last but one, had gathered into Cusco huge masses of gold and siluer vnfined: which the Indians hid so secretly, as the Spaniards could neuer come by it, there was also in and about Cusco great store of picture-tables and tombes all of sine siluer, worth some thirtie, some fiftie, some threescore thousand Ducats a peece: also dining-tables, vessels, and Images a great number, all of fine gold. The Spaniards at the taking of Antibalippa, found as good as 252000. pounds of siluer, and of gold 1300265. pezoes, euery pezo valued at a Ducat and a halse. Besides the great golden table of Antibalippa, worth nigh 40000. Crownes. Now for all this great spoile that the Spaniards got, and hauock that they made, as well in Peru, as other the Prouinces there-about, yet the Indians (as Benzo reports, who stayed there with the Spaniards fourteene yeares, and wrote in three bookes, worthy reading, that whole story) they sticke not to say, they haue yet more remaining than all that the Spaniards euer had. And to make their meaning plainer, they will take out of a great vessel ful of wheat one grain betwixt their singers, & say: See you this? the Viracochie (so they call the Spaniards) haue taken, as it were, this one graine away: but thus much (say they, pointing to the rest in the vessell) thus much and more haue they left behinde them. Now the word Viracochie, because it comes thus in my way, Benzo himselfe in his third booke saith, it signifies the froth or scumme of the Sea: and that the Peruvians so call the Spaniards for deepe hatred and abomination of them; saying also sometimes one to another in their language: The wind beares downe houses and trees, and the fire burnes them, but these Viracochie they doe worse than wind and fire. They waste all, they eat all, they turne the earth and all vpside downe: they [Page 121] turne the course of Riuers: they are neuer at quiet: they neuer cease ranging vp and downe to seeke gold and siluer: and all they finde is too little for them. When they haue it, what doe they? They take their pleasure, they warre one with another, rob one another, kill one another: they are euer giuen to lying, blaspheming, and denying the same God whom they professe: and these men haue cruelly slame without cause our fathers, our children and kinsfolkes, taken from vs, contrary to all right, our goods, our libertie and countrie. Hauing thus commended the Spaniards, they cause the Sea for vomiting on the Earth so cruell and wicked a people, and often haue vpbraided the Spaniards themselues with this notorious reproach: that Gold was the Christians God. O how shall this people in the latter day condemne that euer greedy couetousnesse, for which Europe now adaies heareth so ill, and is by the selfe-people thereof so wasted and vnpeopled! But concerning the diuers gouernments of the West-Indies, seeing they are set downe so well at large by Lopes, Ou [...]ede, Benzo and others, it is too great a matter for me to handle in this discourse, which is (I feare me) growne too long already: therefore will I draw to an end. The Poet at the 413. verse begins to shew some likely opinions how this newfound world was pleopled: and first in generall, that the people of countries inhabited, exercising their ordinary traffick one with another, might sometimes be cast by force of tempest vpon the West-Indian shore, and so be constrained (their ships being broken) to remaine still there. Others by plague, war, or famine were driuen to leaue their countries, and seeke some quietter dwelling farre off, and so haue lighted on these new Countries. Or perhaps some great man of authority, or cunning Pilot, by ventring made a discouery thereof, and led the ouer-creases of some people thither. As the Poet sheweth more particularly in the verses following.
44 Nay could not long agoe. He guesseth in speciall (and most likely) that the inhabitants of the furthest Northeast shore of Asia, to wit, the men of Quinsay, and other places there, might haue emptied their ouer-peopled Cities, by passing the Anien Straight (a part of Sea no broader (as he saith) then the Phare of Gallipoli, Gibraltare, or Messine) and so from the East Indies might they haue stored first the land of Tolguage (which Theues, in his map of the new world, placeth betwixt the Realmes of Anián, Tolm, and Quiuir, within 15 degrees of the North-pole:) then the rest as followeth.
45 So from the Wastes of Tolm and Quiuir. In all this huge Northren part of America, few people there are, especially toward the coast ouer against Quinsay and the other East countries. There are therefore great Waste-lands (as the later Card-men haue noted) about the kingdomes or countries of Anian, Tolguage, Quiuir and Tolm, about 12000 leagues compasse.
So then the Poet holds opinion that some of Sems posteritie, hauing once passed from the farthest East-point of Asia ouer to the West-Indian Coast, thrust their of-spring farther into the land. The Countries here named by the Poet, are to be found in the Sea-cards and Land-maps betwixt Now-Spaine and Estotilant: as if he meant that the North-part of America was first inhabited: concerning the properties and particular descriptions of [Page 122] these places, reade the third volume of the Spanish Nauigations, the second Booke of the generall historie of Lopez de Gomara, chap. 37. &c. the Historie of Florida, Benzo, the Reports of Johannes Verazzanus, laques Cartier, and other French Captaines, concerning their discouering of the Land of Labour (where the Sea is frozen) Baccalos, New France, Canada, Hochilega, and other lands thereabouts. Reade Thenet also, and the later Card men. For the French Calienza I haue translated Caliquas, according as I finde it writted both in others and in Ortellus; who also hath for Mechi Terlichi-mechi; and therefore I translate it Terlichi.
46 They sow'd at'nother side. Xalisco, now called Noua Gallicia, is described by Gomara in the 21. chapter of his fift booke. It is a land very fruitfull, and rich in honey, waxe and siluer: and the people there are Idolaters and Men-eaters. Nunnius Gusmannus, who seized the country for the King of Spaine in the yeare 1530. hath written a discourse thereof, and it is to be read in the third volume of the Spanish Nauigations The Prouince of Mechuacan (from whence not far lyeth Cusule) is about 40 leagues lower southward then Xalisco: that also the said Gusmannus conquered, after he had most cruelly and traiterously put to death the Prince and Peeres of the country, as Gomara sheweth in his booke and chapter aboue quoted. Mexico (which some account all one with Themixtetan) is the mother-Citie of that kingdome, now called Hispania Nona: wonderfull rich it is and strong, and of high renoume: built, farre more curiously then Venice, vpon a lake salt on the north-side, because it is there of a Sea-like breadth, and on the southside fresh, because of a Riuer that empties there into it. Greater is the Citie thought to be, then Seuille in Spaine, the streets are passing well set, and their channels in such manner cast, as cannot be mended. Diuers places there are to buy and sell-in the needfull and ordinarie wares, but one there is greater then the rest, with many walkes and galleries round about it, where euery day may be seene aboue threescore thousand Chapmen. There is the Iudgement Hall for common Pleas: and were also many temples and shrines of Idols before the comming of Ferdinando Cortez, who made thereof the first conquest for the king of Spaine, exercising most horrible cruelties vpon all both young and old in the Citie, as Barthelemi delas Casas, a Monke and Bishop of Spaine, reports in his historie of the Indies, where he stayed a long time. Looke the description of Mexico in the third volume of the Spanish Nauigations, fol. 300. See also Benzo of Millaine his historie of the new world, the second booke and 13. Chapter. Now from these parts abouenamed, (after report of some wonders of many there seene, and worthy a larger discourse by themselues) the Poet drawes his Colonies downe further towards Peru, by the Land-straight of Panama, which parts the South-sea from the Ocean, and thereabout is hardly 20. leagues in breadth. The fiery mountaine of Nicaragua is by Gomara described in his fist booke, chap. 203. so are the other wonders, which the Poet here notes, in his fourth booke, chap. 194.
47 Then Chili they possest. Gomara, in his fourth booke, chap. 131. holds opinion that the men of Chili are the right Antipodes or Counter-walkers vnto Spaine, [Page 123] and that the country there is of the same temper with Andaluzie. This Chili lyeth on the shore of el Mar Pacisico, so also doth Quintete (which I haue put for Chinca) both neere the Panagones or Giants, whose country is full of people, and hath certaine riuers that runne by day and stand by night, some thinke because of the snowes which in the day time are melted by the Sunne, and frozen by the Moone in the night: but I take it rather to be some great secret and miracle of nature. The cause, why here I made exchange of Chinca, was first for that the Poet had spoke before of the springs of Chink, which I take for the same; then because it is so diuerfly placed of the Card-men: for Ortelius, in his Map of the New World, sets it aboue, and Theuet beside Chili, in either place it stands well to be taken for the Chink aforenamed: but Mercator placeth it a great deale lower, and on the contarry coast, neere the riuer of Plata, where indeed is a country called Chica, that perhaps hath bred this error. Lastly, Quintete stands so right in way, which the Poet followes, from Chili to the Patagones, that I thought it not amisse to take the same rather then the doubtfull Chinca. By the somie Brack of Magellanus, he meanes the Sea and Straight of Magellan close by terra Australis. Gomara describeth it well in the beginning of the third booke of his Portugall Historie. The Poet hath already shewed how people came first on the North- America from the kingdome of Anian ouer the maine land to the Atlantick sea shore, then on all the further coasts from Quiuir to the Magellan Straight, along the Archipelago de San Lazaro, Mar del Zur, & Pacifico: and now hee takes the higher side on the left hand from the Land-Straight of Panama to the riuer of Plata, which is not farre from the Magellan: noting by the way the most note-worthy places of all this huge reach of ground, represented, as it is, by our late writers in their generall and particular Maps of the Newfound world. Huo is a great sweat-water streame arising at Quillacingas, (that lieth vnder the Equator) and running athwart the country called Caribage into the Sea at Garra. Vraba is the country that lieth betwixt that riuer and Carthagene. Concerning Zenu, marke what Gomara saith thereof in his second booke and 69. chapter. It is the name of a Riuer and Citie both, and of a Hauen very large and sure. The Citie is some 8. leagues from the Sea. There is a great Mart for Salt and Fish. Gold the inhabitants gather all about; and when they set themselues to get much, they lay sine-wrought nets in the riuer of Zenu and others, and oftentimes they draw-vp graines of pure gold as big as eggs. This country is not farre from the Straight of Darien. In the said second booke, chap. 72. He describes also Noua Grenada, and the Mount of Emeraudes: which is very high, bare, and peeld, without any herbe or tree thereon growing, and lyeth some fiue degrees on this side the Equator. The Indians, when they goe-about to get the stones, first vse many enchauntments to know where the best veine is. The first time the Spaniards came there, they drew thence great and little 1800. very faire and of great price: but for this commoditie, the country is so barren that the people were faine to feed on Pismers: till of late the Spanish couetousnesse hath made them know the value of their Mountaine. Cumana is described in the foresaid booke, chap. 79. in the end whereof Gomara saith, the vapours [Page 124] of the riuer Cumana engender a certaine little mist or slime vpon mens eyes, so as the people there are very pore-blind. Parie is described in the 84, chapter of the said second booke. Maragnon, a Riuer, which (as Gomara saith, 2 booke, 87 chapter) is threescore miles ouer. It emprieth at the Cape of Alinde, three degrees beyond the Aequator: but springeth a great way further South, by Tarama in Peru; thence running Eastward, it casteth only an Arme into the Amazon about Picora. Which hath caused many the first writers of America to count from that place both but one riuer. So also doth our Poet here: otherwise he would haue msntioned first how the people passed the Amezon, that other great streame now knowne by the name of Orenoque; which riseth about Carangui, and emptieth (as Theuet saith) 104. leagues aboue the mouth of Maragnon. Bresile, which the Spaniard discouered in the yeare 1504. is surnamed fierce, because of the Canibales, Caribes, and other man-eating people there. I. de Leri hath written very fully all the historie of his aduenture in part of the country, where dwell the people called Toupinamboes. The riuer of Plata the Indians call Paranagacuc, which word importeth as much as a great water. Gomara speaking thereof in the 89. chapter of his second booke, saith, In this riuer is found siluer, pearles, and other things of great price. It containes in breadth 25. leagues, making many Islands and swels like Nilus, and about the selfe-same time. It springeth first out of the mountaines of Peru, and is after increased by the infall of many riuers: for the country thereabout is leuell, or slat, whereof it seemes to haue receiued the name of Plate.
Thus the Poet guesseth at the manner of this new-found worlds empeopling by the coast of Asia. Whereunto I will adde what Arias Mont that learned Spaniard hath written thereof in his booke entituled Phaleg. He saith Ioktan the double pety-sonne of Sem, (that is, whose double grandfather Sem was) had thirteene sonnes, which are named by Moses in the 10. of Genesis, and some of them peopled the West Indies from the East. That which Moses saith, Genesis 10. chap. 30. vers. concerning Sephar a mountaine of the East, Arias applies to the great hills of Peru, which the Spaniards call Andes: they reach out further in length then any other in the world, and neere them stands an ancient towne called Iuktan. Moreouer, there lies higher a neere-Isle, betwixt Cuba and Mexico, called Iukatas: which may bee thought to resemble still the name of him that first brought people into the country. To Ophir, one of the sonnes of Ioktan, Arias allots the land of Peru: for as much as in the third chapter, and six verse of the second booke of Chron. there is mention made of the gold of Paruaim. To Iobab the country of Paria, which is neere the Straight of Panama, very [...]i [...]h also in gold and pearle. I haue said else-where that Arias Montanus tooke Asia to be all one main-land with America, and knew no Anian Straight. If that be true, sure the race of Sem peopled those quarters. But others considering the horrible ignorance and brutishnesse of the West-Indians so lately discouered, and the rather to excuse their outragious cruelty exercised vpon the poore people, cannot thinke but that [Page 125] they are some relikes of the race of Cham. This opinion hath but a weake ground, as he may well perceiue that will duly examine the circumstances. For strange it is not that the race of Sem, after so many generations, and in so farre discoasted Countries, should at length be thus corrupted. Besides, the West-Indies in diuers places liue still after the manner of the East. But for better answering sundry obiections, that make to proue them Chamites, reade the Preface to the New-found world of Benzo, Frenched by M. Vrbain Chauueton.
48 Morcouer one may say. This is another guesse of the Poet; as that the West-India was peopled from the North by some Iaphethites, who ventured ouer the Straight of Grotland. Indeed these Northerne countries haue euer swarmed with people: and well it may be, that some thence by others driuen, or by necessity, or of their owne heads, haue sought that way other [Page 125] places more to their liking. As also that the coasts of Bresile and Plata (which I thinke the Poet meanes by the Shore of Corican) were peopled by some Chamites from Terminan, Tombut, and Melli, Countries lying in the West of Affricke, about the fall of Niger. For vnlikery it were, seeing Almightie God gaue the whole earth to Noe and his three sonnes, ( Gen 9.) that the race of any one of them should engrosse all this New-found world, beside his part in the other. Thus rather doubtlesse, as the Poet guesseth, and I am further bold to gather, by little and little, at sundrie times and places, did all the three Families of Noe possesse those quarters as the rest: that the will of God might be fulfilled, and the light of his glory appeare, in so equall parting and ouer-peopling the whole earth: howsoeuer all that huge reach of ground that lieth vnder the South-pole, and is thought the fist and greatest part (if it all be habitable) is as yet vnknowne, or very little discouered.
49 Well may I grant. This is the second obiection against that hath beene said concerning the Colonies drawne from Noes three sonnes: to wit, that it is impossible so few housholds should in so short time fill so many countries as are in the world, so thicke as now they swarme.
50 Jf little thou regard. The Poet answers at large, and very exactly to the said obiection. First, out of the words of Moses, Gen. 9. And God blessed Noe and his children, and said vnto them: Encrease and fill the earth. This answer is right to the point, and very sufficient to stop the mouthes of all curious questioners, that at least beleeue the word and power of God. Such is also the answer following.
51 If thou profane deny. He that beleeues the holy Scripture knowes well that in the space of foure hundred yeares the family of Iacob, no more than seuentie persons, encreased in Aegypt vnto the number of fiue hundred thousand, besides women and children. This is an argument from the lesse to the greater: if in one little countrie a few so much encreased, and that in the short space of 400. yeares; how much more might all the people else in the world encrease in 4000. yeares? But the prophane man will not beleeue the story, he will say it is vnpossible. I will make no miracle of it, although the Scripture noteth how the people encreased maruellously; and therefore vseth a word which signifieth to multiply, or spawne like fishes. But let him cast account, as neare as he can, not of excesse, but the ordinarie encrease that might arise of seuentie persons in the space they were in Aegypt, and before he come to two hundred & fifty of the foure hundred, he shall haue the number, as Morneus noteth in his book Deveritate, Chap. 26.
52 At least consider how. This the third answer is also of great importance, especially for Atheists: because it relieth vpon naturall reason: as namely, that a purer sood, and better health, with peace, strength, rest, long life, and Polygamie (which is the vse of many wiues) made greatly for the encrease of mankinde in those former times. Each point of this answer is [Page 127] of great waight, and may perswade easily all that is written of the matter.
53 Right so a graine of Wheat. For confirmation of the foresaid arguments, he bringeth in two fine comparisons, and sit for the purpose. The one drawne from a corne of Wheat, the other from the spawne of two fishes. Both so much the better in this case, because they are of common things, and such as we daily see before our eyes.
54 Haue we not in our daies. He confirmes his reasons further by a notable example of a certain man, who liued to see a whole towne, of no lesse then 100, houses, peopled only with persons issued of himselfe and his: so that there were no names in law for their degrees of blood: Ludouicus Viues affirmeth he saw the man in Spaine. There died also lately an honourable Lady in Germanie, who saw of her selfe and hers borne a hundred and threescore children; notwithstanding many died vnmarried, and those that were married are yet like to haue more.
55 Who knowes not that within. Loe another notable example of a few Arabian families, set downe at large by Iohn Lyon in his historie of Affrick, and cited also by Philip Morney in his 26. chapter de Veritate. And wee see (saith he) how the threescore Families, that for the Sect of Califa moued out of Arabia, in lesse then three hundred yeares haue peopled all Affrick: so as at this day the countries there are surnamed after them Beni Megher, Beni Guariten, Beni Fensecar, &c. that is, The sonnes of Megher, the sonnes of Guariten, the sonnes of Fensecar, &c. as each of them grew-vp to a people. In like sort the East-Indies, that were discouered now a hundred yeares agoe, and straight ahnost vnpeopled, within another hundred will be stored againe and repeopled by the Spaniards.
56 Now if they so increase. A strong conclusion from the Lesse to the More, gathered out of the example next aforegoing: thus, If the people of Affrick, that are not very fit to engender, were able in few yeares to store so huge countries; how much more might the Northerne and Asiaticke [Page 128] people increase? and if a small number of weaklings; how much rather an infinite sort of lustie and fruitfull men? This is grounded vpon naturall reason, regarding the climats and site of each countries, together with daily experience of the matter. Hipocrates in his booke de Acre, aquis & locis, and his enterpreters discourse at large thereon. It were long to follow their steps, and I haue been too long in this matter already.
57 And thence the Cambrians. For a further proofe of the last conclusion, hee alleadgeth, and no man can denie, that the North hath alway brought forth most and most warlike people: (and diuers he reckons-vp, of whom we haue spoken heretofore) whereas from the South haue hardly euer come aboue two Armies worth naming. The one vnder command of Hanibal, whom the Poet noteth by the name of Borgne, (which is as much to say as Blind, or bad-eyed) because he lost an eye by ouer-watching himselfe in the passage of certaine great marrish grounds into Hetruria, Liuie. 22. He it was [Page 128] that enlarged the Empire of Carthage, by meanes of the great ouerthrowes he gaue the Romans, but was after driuen out of Italic, and in Affrick quite vanquished at Zama field, where the Carthaginians were forced to yeeld themselues wholly to the Romans mercy, so had their Citie razed and their State viterly destroyed. The other Armie of the South was of Sarasens, no lesse then foure hundred thousand strong, led by their King and Captaine Abderame: they set out of Affrick into Spaine, from thence marched forward into Aquitaine, and came wasting all the way as farre as the Citie of Tours; there three hundred thousand of them, with the King himselfe, were slaine by the French, who had for Generall the Duke or Prince Charles, that for this great and happy victorie was after surnamed Martel the Maul: because he broke and battered the force of that Southerne people, as a great maul or hammer doth Iron. Looke the Histories and Chronicles of France in the life of Charles Martel.
58 O world of sundry kindes! Without this discourse, all that went before concerning the worlds enpeopling, were to lit'le purpose or none at all, saue only to breed many doubts in the Readers vnderstanding. For a man may aske, How falls it out that the Nations of the world, comming all of one father, Noe, doe varie so much one from another, both in body and minde? The Poet therefore making this obiection, most worthy to be considered, giueth also answer thereunto: first, in generall, by way of exclamation and [Page 133] maruaile, then in particular manner, setting downe some speciall reasons of this wonderfull diuersitie, that appeareth in the stature, complexion, strength, colour, and custome of people wheresoeuer dispersed ouer the face of the earth. The first and principall cause is Nature it selfe, that is, the wise prouidence of God, maruellous in all his workes. If God had made the earth in all places alike, all flowers of one colour and sauour, all beasts, fowles, fishes and creeping things, of one kinde; had he made the heauen without [Page 134] starres, or the starres all of one bignesse, and men all of the same hew, beauty, feature, strength and disposition, as well of bodie as minde: the diuers colours of his infinite wisdome had not so shined in them. But as he is aboue all (yea onely) wise, good and beautifull, so would he in his workes keepe a certaine resemblance of his owne perfection, prouoking vs thereby daily to aduance and raise our thoughts vnto the high consideration, perfect loue and due reuerence of himselfe. Now if we consider all his workes, the light of his wonderfull glory no where appeareth more, then in the diligent view of Man, who is very fitly called of the Greekes [...], the little world. For in this little table hath he lymbed-out in orient colours, for all that will behold, the wonders of his vnsearchable wisdome: and they are here some of them by the Poet well pointed-out. And a wonderfull thing indeed it is, that among so many men as haue beene since the beginning, are, or shall be to the worlds end, there neuer was, nor is, nor can be any one, but differing much from all the rest, both in bodie and minde, and in many things else that ensue thereon. This I am content to note, but in a word, leauing all the particulars of this miracle for the Reader priuatly to consider; that he may wonder the more thereat, and praise there-according th' almighty Creator, the Soueraigne Good: neither will I now take in hand to dispute against those that in searching the causes of this diuersitie, ascribe all to Fortune or Nature, as they call it (meaning a secret propertie and power of the creatures) or to the starres and other heauenly bodies; to mans lawes, custome or nourishment, in stead of God: who is indeed the first and only working cause of all things; in whom we liue, moue and are. This matter would require a long discourse; and though the Poet here, beside the chiefe and only tine cause, reckoneth certaine vnder-causes; as custome growing to Nature, th'example of Elders, prouinciall Lawes, and the influence of Stars; it is not his meaning to take from the Lord of Nature this honour due vnto him for the diuersitie of his wonderfull works: but only to lay open vnto vs a few such instruments as his incomprehensible wisdome vseth, to make vs the better conceiue the manner of his heauenly working. The Philosophers, Astronomers, Physicians and Politicks, discourse at large vpon these differences: he that would see them well handled, let him reade the fift chapter of Bodines Method, entituled de recto historiarum indicio, and the first chapter of his fift booke de Republica, which is the summe of all that he writes thereof in his Method. Peucer also in the 13. and 14. bookes of his discourse vpon the principall sorts of diuinations: and Hippocrates in his booke de Aëre, aquis & locis: but especially Bodin, may ferue to expound our Poet; who in very few lines hath penned matter of so long discourse.
59 The Northen man. He entreth consideration of many points, wherein the North and Southerne people differ Bodin in the places afore-quoted shewes the causes thereof, according to Philosophie and Physicke: because his bookes are common, specially his Politicks, I will not here set downe what he saith, nor examine his opinions, but leaue that wholly to the diligent Reader. Concerning that the Poer noteth, the best Histories auerre the same: and namely for the Southerne people, Iohannes Leo, and Franciscus [Page 135] Aluares; for the Northen, Olaus Magnus, the Baron of Herbestan in his Muscouie, Buchanan in the historie of Scotland, and diuers others.
60 The Middle Man. Bodm in the fift booke of his Politickes, the first chapter, diuideth all people dwelling on this side the Aequator into 3. kinds, to wit, the hot and Southerne people from the Aequator 30. degrees vpward; the Meane and temperate in the next 30. and the Extreame cold and Northen people, from the 60. degree to the Pole. And so of the nations and countries beyond the Aequator. The reason hereof he setteth downe in his Method, chap. 5.
61 For in the sacred close. The Poet goes on according to the said diuision: and in few words implies all that discourse of Bodin: who saith among other matters there, that the people dwelling in the middle Regions haue more strength and lesse wit then the Southerne; better parts of minde, and lesse bodily force then the Northen: and are moreouer the fittest for gouernment of Common-wealths, and iustest in their actions. And if a man doe marke well the histories of the world, he shall finde that the greatest and most valiant Armies came euer out of the North: the deepest and subtilest knowledge of Philosophie, Mathematickes, and all other contemplatiue Arts, from the South: and the best gouernment, the best lawes, Lawyers and Orators from the Middle countries; and that the greatest Empires were founded and established there, &c. What reason there is for this, he sheweth also in his fift chap. of his Meth. Looke more thereof in L. Regius, de vicissitudine & varietate rerum. For my part, I am of opinion that Almighty God as he hath knit and bound together the Elements, and Creatures made of them, with a maruellous compasse, in number, weight and measure, best for continuance of the whole worke, and mutuall agreement of the parts; so hee hath also placed the chiefe subtiltie and liuely-hood of spirit farthest from the greatest bodily force, either in beast or man; for the better maintenance of humane societie in a iust counterpoys, and gaue the middle kinde of people a nature of either tempered, though if a man enter into particular discourse, he may easily finde the northerne, southerne and middle Nature in euery Nation. What say I, euery Nation? nay I dare say in euery one of vs, so fitly is Man called a little world. But the southerne men, for the most part hauing so quick and liuely parts of minde in a bodie lesse charged with flesh, they represent the contemplatiue and studious kinde of life: the northerne that haue their vvit in their fingers ends, that is, that are so cunning craftesmen, inuenters of warlike engins, artillerie, and all sorts of needfull instruments, they may well be likened vnto the actiue and trading life: and the middle sort vnto the ciuill gouernment and politicke life; which is a meane betwixt the other two. Yet this the Poet well restraineth, saying, that the northerne people also in these latter dayes haue beene renowmed for the Tongues, the Lawes, the Mathematicks, Poesie, Oratorie, and all good learning; as well as in times past, they were, and are still, for warlike valour and cunning handworks. Not without cause; for in England, Scotland, Polonie, Denmarke, and other such countries, are and haue beene diuers very learned men flourishing: and Germanie especially, which is (as it were) Vuleans forge, and the [Page 136] Campe of Mars, hath brought forth many men excelent well seene in all kinde of learning it were needlesse to name them, they are so well knowne.
62 But eu'n among our selues. The more to magnifie the vnsoundable wisdome of God, appearing in the creation of so diuers-disposed people, he noteth out many points of great difference euen among those Nations that liue neare together, and are seuered only by certaine hilles, riuers, and forrests: as the French, Dutch, Jtalian, and Spanish. He paints them out all in their kinde, for such properties as are daily seene in them, and may be easily gathered out of their owne Histories: for there are not the like-differing neighbour-nations in all Europe, no not in the world. Let me consider, and all my Countrey-men with me, what he saith of the French: the other three may doe the like by themselues if they list. The French (he saith) is in Warre impatient, in Counsaile wauering, in Diet sumptuous, gentle in Speech, diuers in Apparell, out-facing his Enemie, a sweet Singer, a swift Paser, a merty Louer. If any man can draw a righter counterfeit of our Nation, let him take the pensill.
63 Yet would the immortall God. He shewes for what cause it pleased God the earth should be inhabited by men of so diuers natures: As first, to the end he might shew forth his mercy and louing kindnesse in raising his chosen out of the sincks of sinne, wherewith each of their birth soiles were bestained. Secondly, That it might appeare how neither the soiles, nor yet the heauenly Signes (though they haue great power ouer earthly bodies) can force the minds of men, especially such as God himselfe hath blessed. Thirdly, That there might be some in all places of the world to acknowledge his manifold goodnesse, and glorifie his Name. And fourthly, that whatsoeuer needfull things the earth any where, by his gartious blessing, bringeth forth proper and seuerally, they might be enterchanged and carried from place to place for the vse of man.
64 For as a Citie. The last consideration giues the Author occasion to compare the world vnto a great Citie, such as Paris, Roan, Tolouse, Lyons, or any other like, where there are merchants and craftesmen for all kinde of wares, each in their seuerall wards, buying, selling, changing and trading one with another. And euen so one Countrey affordeth Suger, another Spice, another Gummes; and Gold, Alabaster, Iuory, Heben-wood. Horses, Amber, Furres, Tynne and Silke, they are brought from diuers coasts, all the more to furnish with things necessary this great Citie of the world. Whereby we may note that no Countrie (be it neuer so well appointed) can say that it needs not the commodities of another. And againe, that there is no Land so barren, but hath some good thing or other which the rest want. For euen in men we see the like; there is none so poore but hath some speciall gift: none so rich, but hath need of the poorest. Our Poet therefore hauing so fitly resembled the world by a great Citie, he brings-in thereupon a sine example of the Persian Queene, who (as Herodotus, Xenophon and Plutarch report) called one Prouince her lewell-house, another her Wardrope, &c. for euen so may euery man say, that hath the true knowledge and feare of God; such a man may say, Peru brings forth Gold for me: the [Page 137] Moluckes or Chaldea, Spice: Damaske, Alabaster: and Italy, Silke: Germany sends me great Horses: Moscouie, rich Furres: Arabia, sweet Parfumes: Spaine, Saffron: Prusse, Amber: England, Cloth and Tinne: France, Corne and Wine. Yea more the childe of God may say; the Earth, the Sea, the Aire and all that is therein; the Sunne, the Moone, the Heauens, are mine: for he that needeth nothing, made all things of nothing to serue me, and mee to worship him. But of this let the Diuines discourse more at large. I will goe on with the Poet: who saith further, against the carping Atheist, that nothing was created in vaine, but euen the most vnlikely places bring forth many good fruits, and very necessary for the life of Man. And hee proues it plainly by some notable particulars that follow.
65 The Moores enameled. First, The Fenny Valleyes, though too moist they are and ouer-low for men to build and dwell vpon, yet are they so beset with diuers harbes and flowers, so lagged, garded, and enter-trailed with riuers, that they are, as it were, the common gardens of the world: as also the plaine fields are our seed-plots, and the stony grounds our Vineyards. Secondly, The huge Mountaines, about whose tops are engendred thunders, lightnings and tempests: for which cause the Atheists count them hurtfull, or at least superfluous, or made by chance and errour: they are in truth cleane contrary (as Th [...]odoret hath long agoe shewed in his Sermons of Gods Prouidence) [...]uen the sure standing Bounds and Land-markes of euery Kingdome and Countrie: they beare great store of timber-trees for ships and houses, and fuell to burne: from them spring the great riners, that breed much fish, and helpe the conueyance of prouision and other merchandise vnto many people dwelling farre-off: by them are stayed and gathered the clowdes and thicke mists, that manure and fatten the lower grounds: the Wind-milles are much helped by them, as if they were the the store houses of winde: like rampiers and bulwarkes they keepe-of the sudden force of warlike neighbours: and to conclude, they are (as it were) the very morter that ioynes Land and Sea together. Thirdly, The great Deserts and wast-grounds, that are for men (by reason of some wants) searse habitable, yet like huge Commons they feed an infinit sort of beasts great and small, whereof we haue good vse and commoditie. Fourthly, The Sea, it breeds fish, maintaines many Cities, encreases Trafficke, and makes the wayes for trauell easier, and shorter: And lastly, thereout the Sunne draweth vapours, which after, turned into raine, doe refresh the Aire, and make the ground fruitfull. The like good vses may be found in all other the Creatures of God, how vnlikely foeuer they seeme to wicked Atheists. Looke more in S. Basil, Chrysostome, Ambrose and others, who write of the Creation, and at large haue declared what excellent commodities man may reape of euery creature.
66 But shall I still be toss'd. Fitly and in very good time the Poet, hauing ouerslipt nothing worthy note in this discourse of Colonies, now strikes saile, and after his long voyage thorow all Climates of the world, ariues happily at the hauen he most desired, to weet, in France: and well he takes occasion to reckon-vp the great commodities of his countrie, as commending [Page 138] the same aboue all the Kingdomes of the world. After he hath saluted the land with diuers honourable termes and titles, he saith very truly, that it hath brought-forth many worthy warriours, cunning work-men, and learned Schollers: more is the meruaile, because it is but a small kingdome in comparison of Polonia, Persia, Tartaria, China and others. But indeed the commodities thereof are most wonderfull. Besides the seas that bound it, as on the North and West the Ocean, and the Midland on the South, it hath many riuers of great name, and euen little seas: as the Rosne, Saone, Dordogne, Loire, Marne, Seine, Oise: and yet a great number of other lesser streames and brookes. Cities it hath, as Paris, Tolouse, Ro [...]m, Lyon, Bourdeaux, and others of more value then diuers whole Dutchies, Earldomes, or Prouinces elsewhere. There are Forts and Castles now stronger and goodlier than euer were. As for the ciuill behauiour of the people, I report me to the iudgement of other nations. The Land for the most part is very fruitfull, and the aire there temperate almost euery where. Against the sudden inuasion of enemies, all is well defended by the two Seas aforesaid, and the Alpes toward Italy, and the Pyrenes toward Spaine. More than all [Page 138] this, the countrie is no where troubled with Crocodiles as Aegypt is, nor with monstrous long Serpents, or any wilde rauening beasts, as the inner countries of Affricke are. And in stead of Gold and Siluer, Pearles and precious stones, which diuers Lands barren of necessary fruits abound with, it hath of Cloath, Woade, Wood, Salt Corne and Wine, euer-growing Mines, and euen vnwastable: Woade and Salt in Languedoc; and Salt againe in Guyenne; Wine in most places; Wooll and Corne in Prouence and Beausse; and in euery Prouince, but foure or fiue, good store of diuers the said commodities. More there are, but the Poet notes the chiefe only, and such as the neighbour countries and many farre-off doe most of all trade-for. Hereby we are taught, and should be moued with heartie thankes to acknowledge the great benefits that God hath bestowed on vs: for the Poet rightly concludes that we lacke nothing but peace, and peace he craueth of the Lord: with whom, and all my good countrimen, I ioyne humble suit from the bottome of my heart, that once againe this Realme (sometime so flourishing) may enioy a sure, that is, a iust and right Christian peace. Amen.
LES COLOMNES. The Pillars, or fourth Booke of Noe.
1. Thine heau'nly furie. That is Inspiration; a word well taken among the Poets, who say, Est deus in nobis, agitante calescimus illo. The Prophets also, swayed by the Spirit of God, had their extraordinarie motions, extasies, and rauishments; which were holy possessions and inspirations: yet such suffred not the inspired seruants to wander from the way of truth; howsoeuer they had their spirits then raised farre aboue condition of all worldly things. The Poet then craues that the holy Spirit might be present with him, after a speciall manner, to raise him vnto the heauens, where he may learne to sing worthy so great a subiect, as he now takes in hand. The Muses are all sisters of Vrania, whose proper office is to treat of heauen and heauenly things. By heauenly Syrens charmes, he meanes the Harmonie of the Spheres; whereof hereafter. He saith also that our Elders, that is, Adam and his sonnes, were taught, by the hand of God himselfe, rules of the course of Heauen; that is, the knowledge of Astronomie: which is very likely, because the wit of man was not able to atraine to things of so high a nature, without some extraordinarie helpe and fauour.
2. Old Heber. Iosephus in his first booke of Antiquities, toward the end of the second chapter, speaking of the children of Seth, is of opinion that they first inuented Astrologie; and applied their mindes to know the course and motion of those heauenly bodies: And to the end their inuention should not be forgotten, or perish before it was knowne, ( Adam hauing foretold that all things should be destroyed, once by water, and againe by fire) they erected two pillars; one bricke, another stone, the better to withstand the waters; and graued, and set therein the records and rules of their inventions, for posteritie to learne. The pillar of stone some say is yet to be seene in Syria. This doth Iosephus report vpon heare-say: which the Poet termes an old Tradition, or Cabala. Thus Josephus thrusts-in many things among his Antiquities, that haue no good ground, but are taken vpon trust of the Caballists [Page 142] and Rabbins; who neuer considering the maiestie and sufficiencie of holy Scripture, thought to helpe out and adorne it with fillets and labels of their owne. Many learned men thinke that Noe and his sonnes had the Arts well setled in their mindes: and the Arke is a sufficient proofe of Noes skill in Arithmetike and Geometrie: but the Reader may, if he will, ascribe the inuention to Noes predecessors: so doth the Poet, following the opinion of Iosephus. For the rest, he giues the whole discourse of Mathematikes to Heber and Phaleg; because, the earth being in their time diuided, it was requisite that these Arts were knowne, to be carried euery way for comfort and helpe of Colonies, in peopling the world. Cylinderwise it lay. (So I translate) that is, along the ground like a rouller; supposing the waters had ouerthrowne it.
3. Seth. Polidore Virgil, in his first booke de Inuentoribus rerum, chap. 14.17.18. & 19. speakes of the first finders-out of the liberall Sciences, alledging the testimonie of diuers Authors. But it came neuer into his minde to deriue all from the spring-head, as here the Poet hath done, who shewes, with great probabilitie, that Adam, being endowed with excellent knowledge of hidden things concerning both great and little world, taught it his sonne and schollar Seth, and others that conuersed with him; who also conueyed it ouer to their descendants. And this was not hard to be done, considering the long life of them all. So the true Cabala of inheritance left to posteritie, was the instruction which they receiued one from other by word of mouth; and this might be so continued from father to sonne, as it need not be graued in brick or stone. But sithence the Poet was content to set-out the opinion of Iosephus, rather then his owne; Ile say no more against it. The meanes and order kept by Seths posteritie, to continue the knowledge of the Mathematicks, was not all of one sort; though the Poet propounds but one, which was very likely.
4. Thus hauing said, he went. That is, Heber. Poets, missing sometime the certaine truth, are wont yet to stand-vpon that is likely; wherefore this our Author, hauing before spoke-of the pillar of stone, which stood still vpright, brings-in Heber opening the doore thereof by a sleight, and finding therein a burning lampe or candle. This secret of burning lamps of some vnquenchable stone, or other matter of that nature, hath beene vsed in the world long agoe; and proued true by diuers ancient sepulchers found vnder the ground. Selinus in his 12. chap. saith there is in Arcadia a certaine stone of the colour of Iron, which once set a fire cannot be quenched, and therefore is called Asbeslos, which signifies as much. Plutarch, in the beginning of his booke De cessatione Oraculorum, saith as much of the vnquenchable lampe in the Temple of Jupiter Hammon; which was the most ancient, and of most renowme among the Chamites, who soone fell from the true Religion. Plinie, in the first chapter of his 19. booke, tells also a great maruaile of a kinde of linnen cloth which consumes not in the fire. I thinke the immediate successors of Adam and Noe had knowledge of many secrets in Nature, which we now would thinke incredible, impossible, or altogether miraculous, if we saw the experience thereof.
5. As when a priuate man. By an excellent comparison the Poet here describes the affection that Phaleg had to vnderstand these things; and so makes way to his discourse of the Mathematike Arts; which he faines to be sisters, and one much like another; because they are all composed as it were of numbers, concords and proportions, which by Addition, Multiplication, Substraction, and Diuision, doe bring forth great varietie of rare and dainty secrets.
6. My sonne. He shewes in few words the iust commendation of these Liberall Sciences, called here Virgins, because of their simplicitie and puritie: Daughters of Heauen; because they are placed in the vnderstanding, the principall facultie of our soule, which is from Heauen; though the vnderstanding adorned with Mathematikes, doe many times bring forth effects, which depart farther and farther from their spring-head; and so by little and little fall among the Mechanicks, or Handycrafts. He saith also further, that these foure Sciences are the fairest, which that one Spirit issuing from two, (that is, the Holy Ghost, proceeding from the Father and the Sonne) did euer beget, or mans soule conceiue: he speaks this only of such gifts as the Holy Ghost hath imparted vnto men, for the maintenance of their societie. For what were the life of man, if it had neither number, waight, nor measure; neither sight, nor hearing well gouerned? as (needs) it must be while it wants the Mathematikes: whose due praise and profit ensuing, with what other Arts depend thereon, you may reade at large in the Prefaces before Euclide [...]; especially in one of Christopher Clanius, and another of our English Iohn Dee.
7. She there. The learned differ concerning the order and disposition of these foure Arts: some set Geometrie in the first place, Arithmeticke in the second, Musicke in the third, and Astronomie last. Others cleane contrary. Our Author hath followed the most receiued opinion. Reade Scaliger against [Page 144] Cardan, Exer. 321. The chiefe thing is to consider well the bounds and coherences of these Arts, that we neither confound nor seuer them among themselues, nor mingle them with others: for, this doing sometimes hath brought most dangerous errours both into Church and Common-wealth. To proceed: In this description which the Poet makes of Arithmetikes both habit and gesture, we may see what is required to the right vnderstanding that abstract Arte; now adayes farre out of the way, or soyled with grosse materials.
8. Vnitie. In fortie verses, or thereabouts, the Poet hath set downe the grounds of infinite Arithmeticall secrets. He that will search what the ancient and late Authors haue written, shall finde matter enough for a good thicke booke: I speake here but briefly, so much as may serue for vnderstanding the text, leauing the rest to a larger Commentarie. First, he calls Vnitie, or One, the root of all numbers; because euery number, great and small, ariseth from One. Secondly, he calls it also the root of Infinitie; for the greatest numbers, and such as vnto vs are vncountable or infinite, what are they but multiplied Vnities? Thirdly, he tearmes Vnitie, True friendships deare delight; because the faithfull louer delights in one onely, and seeks no more. Fourthly, The renowme of Harmonie; which tends to one sweet consort of diuers voyces. Fiftly, The seed-plot of all that is; because by one spice or kinde, of man, beast, fish, fowle, &c. was filled the whole world. Sixtly, he calls it the Aime of Polymnie. I thinke by this he meanes the intent that all learned men haue, in their discourses by word or writing, to tend alwayes to some one certaine point or end, as the only marke they aime or leuell-at. Let the Reader finde out some better note hereupon; for mine owne scarse contents me. Seuenthly, this Vnitie is said to be no number; because a number (taken as it is commonly for a name of multitude) is composed of many vnities: and more then number, because it giues a being to all numbers; and thus it hath a power to comprehend all numbers, and is actually in all. Let vs adde a word more to the praise of Vnitie; God is one, and the Church, of many gathered together, is but one; yea there was but one Creator, one world, one man; for of him was the woman framed; one language before the confusion of Babel; one Law, one Gospell, one Baptisme, one Supper of the Lord; one hope, one loue, one Paradise, one life euerlasting. Concerning the diuers significations of one, and other numbers in holy Scripture, I forbeare to speake; because the Poet makes no plaine mention thereof. But this I note further; that out of these verses, so artificially couched together, nothing can be drawne, which may any way seeme to fauour their vaine speculations; who goe about to build vpon numbers the rules of Religion; and such as are of force to establish or ouerthrow Common-wealths: and least of all hath any support or rellyance for Arithmanticall Cheaters, Magicians, and other like mischiefes of the world; who abusing the passages of holy Scripture, where numbers are vsed, thinke they haue found therein the way to foretell what is to come; or power to raise vp Spirits; and in a word, to practise many things vnlawfull; which the curious and profane haue taught by their bookes published in Print: [Page 145] but let their names bee buried in euerlasting silence.
9. Twaine. The Pythagorians called the number of two or twaine, Isis and Diana; because as Diana was barren (saith Plato in his Th [...]te [...]us) so Two, being the head and beginning of Diuersitie, and vnlikenesse, hath no such power, as other numbers haue. It is the father of numbers huen, which the Poet calles esseminate, because they bring forth nothing; but are cause rather of the ruine of Vnitie. For, to diuide a thing, is to destroy it, as Aristotle argues very punctually in the eight Booke of his Metaphysickes. Plutarch in his Treatise of the Soules creation, saith that Zaratas, the Master of Pythagoras, called Two the mother of Numbers, and One the father; whereof he yeelds a reason, which our Author hath in a word.
10. Three. Some account Three the first of all numbers; for, as for Two, the Pythagorians doe not vouchsafe it the name of a number; but call it a confounding of Vnities, which are (to speake properly) no numbers, but the roots and beginnings of numbers. I will say nothing here of the praise of Three, set downe by Plutarch in his Treatise of Isis and Osiris, and elsewhere: nor yet what say the Poets; whose Chiefe hath this; Numero Deus impare gaudet; meaning not an odde number whatsoeuer, as Fiue or Seuen, but only Three, which is the first of all the odde numbers, and makes in Geometry, of three surfaces only, the first body that hath length, breadth, and thicknesse, called a Triangle. The Pythagoreans call this kinde of Solide Minerua; and in their purifications and washings, doe vse much the number of Three. Virgil also toucheth vpon this secret in the 6. of his Aeneids. Thus, Idem ter socios purâ circumtulit vndâ and in the first of his Georg. thus, Ter (que) nouas circum saelix cat hoslia fruges. And Ouid. 2. Fast. thus, Et digitis tria thura tribus sublimine ponit. And in the 6. Protinus arbuteâ postes terin ordine tangit Fronde, ter arbuteâ lamina fronde notal. Infinite authorities haue we to this purpose: to name one, Plinie saith, (in translating, I searched out the place) Nat. Hist. 28.4. Ternâ despuere deprecatione in omni medicinâ mes suit, at (que) ex hec effectus adiu [...]are. But for as much as this, and the like fauours of superstition and witchcraft, I leaue it; and for beare also to shew further how curiously some apply this number vnto diuers mysteries of Religion; contenting my selfe onely to expound the Poets words. First, hee saith it is a number proper vnto God, and I thinke he meanes it of the holy Trinitie, Father, Sonne, and Holy Ghost, which is one true God: for of nothing else can it be said, that Three are One, and One is Three. Againe, he saith it is the eldest brother of all the Odde numbers, but of that wee spoke before. Thirdly, he saith that in this number Three is No number and Number well met. Then he saith further, it is a number well beloued of Almightie God; I translate it Heau'ns fauour winning; and it hath respect either to the sore-alledged place of Virgil; or rather to the effects that God worketh in his creatures, which would make a large Commentary: for the number of three hath beene obserued by some in the Order of Angels sent downe vnto Men; in Men themselues, in Sciences, in Vertues and other things so many, as can hardly be numbred. Moreouer, he saith the number Three hath a Center and two Extremities of equall distance one from another: [Page 146] which is easie to be vnderstood, for the Center of Three is the second Vnitie, which is equally distant from the first and the third, and by this reason also is it the first of all number, that hath End, Middle, and Beginning, which is also very plaine to conceiue.
11 Foure. The Cube, or perfect Square body in Geometrie, hath a piedestall, or base of foure corners, and is the most perfect of Solide bodies, representing stedfastnesse, continuance and vertue; whereof came the prouerbe of Homo quadratus; not square faced like the Chinois (Trigault, in expedit one Iesuitica) but a man disposed and dealing squarely; a man sound, constant, and vertuous. Reade Pierius his Exposition of this number, with the rest, before and after it. I haue said much thereof in my Commentaries vpon the Quartaines of le Sieur de Pybrac. Expos. 39. where he saith, that Truth is framed of a perfect Cube. Now to the rest of our Poets words. Secondly then he ascribes to the number of Foure this property, that with his owne contents, which are one, two, three, he makes vp I en: this is plaine. Thirdly, he saith it is the number of the name most to be feared, that is, the name of God. For the Hebrues write the name of God with foure letters, and say it is vn-vtterable, and pronounce euer Adonai for Ichoua, which name the Diuines call Tetragramaton. Iohn Reuelm hath discoursed largely thereof in his Cabala, and in his bookes de Verbo Mirifico. Other Nations also haue giuen to God a name of foure letters. The Assyrians Adad, the Aegyptians Amun, the Persians Syre, the old Romans Aius, the Greekes ΘΕΟΣ, the Mahumetans Alla, the Goths Thor, the Spaniards Dios, the Italians Idio, the Germans Gott, the French Dieu. I passe by the names Adon, Adni, Iaho, Iesu; as also what some haue inuented vpon the names of Cain, Abel, Seth, Enos; for they haue written herein very much to little purpose. The Spirit of God would haue vs rest vpon the substance of things, not vpon the number of letters vsed in their names. For the fourth commendation of this number, he saith it is the number of the Elements, to wit, the Earth, the Water, the Aire, and the Fire: whereof thus Ouid, Metam. 15. Quatuor [...]ternus genitalia corpora Mundus-Continet &c. And in his first booke more distinctly: Ignea conuexi vis & sine pondere coeli Emicuit, summa (que) [...]cum sibi legit in arce. Proximus est Aer illi leuitate locoque. Densior his Tellus, elementa (que) grandia traxit, Et pressa est grauitatesui. Circumsluus hu [...] Vltima possed [...]t solid [...]am (que) coereuit orbem. For the fist, he saith it represents the foure Seasons of the yeare; the Spring, Sommer, Autumne, and Winter. For the sixt, he compares it to the foure Cardinall Vertues, Iustice, Fortitude, Temperance, and Prudence. For these seuenth, to the Huanours of Mans bodie, bloud, Coller, Phlegme, and Melancholy. For the eight, to the principall Winds, East, West, North, and South. Let me say moreouer, that the Pythagoreans (as Ma [...]rebius reports) had this number in so great esteeme, that they were w [...]n [...] to sweare by it.
12. F [...]ue, th'Ermaphrodite. So called, because it is composed of the Femall [...], and Masculine Three, which is the first Odde number. That which followeth, how this number multiphed alway shewes it selfe, is easie. Plutarch (de Cessatione Oraculorum) and vpon the Title of Et, in the [Page 147] Temple at Delphos, telleth great wonders of this number of Fiue.
13 Th'Analogicke Six. Saint Augustine in his fourth booke, De Trinitate, and in his fourth booke also, De Genesi ad literam; and Hugode S to Victore, in his booke, De Sacramentis, both say the number of Six is a perfect number, because it is composed of his owne proper parts. For the Diuisors of Six (besides the Vnitie, which diuides all numbers by themselues) as 1, is in Six six times, and so of the rest) are 6, 3, and 2. Diuide then Six by Six, the Quotus is 1, diuide it by 3, the Quotus is 2, diuide it by 2, the Quotus is 3, that is a Sixt part, a Third, and a Second, which 1, 2, and 3, being put together, make-vp againe the whole Six, which preoues it a perfect number. Other numbers (the most) thus examined, are found more or lesse than their parts. As the Diuisers of 10. are 10.5. and 2. Ten is in ten once, Fiue is in Ten twise; two is in Ten fiue times, so the Quotes of Ten thus diuided, are 1.2. and 5. which added make but eight, two lesse than the number deuided. Wheras the Diuisers of 12. being 6.4.3. & 1. The Quote of 12 diuided by twelue is 1. by six 2. by foure 3. by three 4. by two 6. and these Quotes 1.2.3.4. and 6. make a Totall of 16. which is foure more than the number diuided Some say then that, Six being the first perfect number, and answerable to his owne parts, therefore it pleased God to create the World in six daies, to shew that all was perfect; nothing more than need, nothing lesse. So by good right is this number tearmed Analogicke, that is, proportionate, and answerable in all points to it selfe; as hath beene shewed.
14 The Criticke Seu'n. First, the Poet calles Seuen a Criticke number, as much to say as Iudging of a matter. For that on the seuenth day Physitions are wont to iudge of a disease to life or death: though sometimes, where a strange and resisting nature is, they double the number, and awaite the fourteenth day; which is (as saith Hippocrates in his Aphorismes) the tearme of diseases, that are simply acute or sharpe. If the maladie passe this day, it is commonly seene that it continues to the one and twentieth, which is a third Seuenth. Looke what Galen saith in his bookes De diebus Criticis; and what Consorius in his booke De die Natali: as also what the Physitians hold concerning euery Seuenth and Climactericall yeare, as of the nine and fortieth, composed of seuen times seuen, and the sixty three, of nine times seuen. In the second place the Poet calles this number Male and Female, because it is made of an Eauen and an Odde, three and foure: hereof see Scaliger in his 365. Exer. against Cardan. In the third and last place, he commends it for the number of the Planets, and of the holy Rest-day; because the Lord rested the seuenth day, and hallowed it.
15 Eight the double Square. The smallest Latus of any Square-number is two, which multiplied by it selfe makes foure, and the same againe multiplied by the Latus two, is eight, which is the first Cube, and double the first Square. Some haue played the subtill Figure-slingers with the Greeke name of our Sauiour [...], and found it to make 888. to wit, eight Vnities, eight Tens, and eight Hundreds; applying also thereto certaine Prophesies of Silylla, but I leaue this subtill deuice, sithence the Poet giues me no occasion to handle it.
16 And sacred Nine. So stiled for the number of the Muses; though otherwise in Musike this number makes a discord; and the Astrologers call it a sinister number, and ill-betokening. In the Theogonie of [...]lodus, and in Virgil, where he speakes of the nine turnings of the infernall Riuer Styx, some are of opinion that it represents the disagreeing Complexions of Mans bodie. See the Hieroglyphikes of Iohn Pierius in his 37. booke.
17 Ten. Of this number Ouid in his booke, De Fastis, speakes very properly; Semper adusque decom numero crescente venitur Principium spatijs sumitur inde nonis. But to our Poet, he saith it containe in it selfe the force and vertue of all numbers, either simply, or by multiplication; as it is plaine in the Text. Againe, he saith it is like the Line in Geometrie, because it is the first that makes a length, for all that goe before it are expressed by single Characters, as 1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9. and so stand like prickes or points not flowing to a Line: but Ten hauing alwaies one other Figure or Cypher ioyned vnto it, thrusts-out into length, and so makes (as it were) a Line in Arithmeticke: beyond which Line there is no proceeding, but by multiplying this Ten againe, and so forth to the greatest number that can be giuen, which may surmount the waues, or sands of the sea. Forcadel in his Arithmeticke, and others, besides those of old, haue shewed the manner how. But Archimedes wrote thereof long agoe, and entituled his worke De numeo arenae. And surely by the multiplication of Ten it may be done. Let them examine or trie it that haue leisure: or rather let vs all leaue this to him that made all things in number, weight, and measure; who onely knowes the the number of the Starres, with all things past, present, and to come.
18 See here. He speakes of the foure fundamentall Rules of Arithmeticke, Addition, Multiplication, Subtraction, and Diuision; where-out doe spring an infinite sort of braue and pleasant secrets, which the Masters of this Art haue plainly set-downe in their bookes. Sithence then the Rules aforesaid are, or may be, well knowne to all men; I say no more of them, but goe-on to consider what our Poet saith of Geometrie.
19. Geometrie. Shee is described as a Nymph that frownes, or hath a wrinkled forehead: because the studie of this Art is very painfull, and makes the student waxe old apace; and crookbackt also, by reason of their much stooping downward, to measure and compasse their plots. Shee is sad and looks stedfastly on the ground: because all hard works make men pensiue and full of care; Geometrie especially, which causeth a man to six his eye wholly vpon that he goes about. Shee hath a wand, or straight rod, also in her hand, wherewith shee drawes certaine figures and shapes in the dust; for that in this Art, aboue others, must be demonstrations vsed, without which the Theoremes and Propositions cannot be vnderstood. And for as much as Shee measures the whole Earth, the breadth and deepnesse of Riuers, high Mountaines, low Valleyes and Mines, with pleasant Medowes, prospects of Seas and Climats from one end of the world to the other; therefore hath the Poet her so apparelled, as we see in his verse. Furthermore She is called the Guide of Artisans; because they without her can doe nothing answerable to the expectation of an vnderstanding eye: and in this respect also is shee called the mother of Symmetrie, or proportion, requisite in all Crafts Mechanicall; yea the soule or life of all those different instruments, which without due measure and proportion would doe more hurt then good, as we finde by experience. Whereas shee is called, The law euen of that law which framed all this All: the Poet herein expounds well that saying of Plato, That God exerciseth Geometric from day to day. This also Moses well signifieth in those words, And God saw all that he had made was perfectly good: and the Wiseman in those; God made all things in number, weight and measure: as indeed a man shall not finde any creature, small or great, in heauen, earth, or Sea, that is not made (as it were) by the rounding-toole, weight-beame, and squire; by the compasse, leuell and perpendicular of an infinite wisdome.
20. Here's nothing else. First he shewes the tooles and instruments necessarie [Page 151] for the practise of Geometrie: then draughts of one dimension, as of leggth only: to wit, Lines straight, for Opticks and planting of Ordnance; and crooked, for mynes, wayes vnder ground, and Labyrinths; as we are taught by the storie of Theseus and Ariadne. Thirdly, shapes of two dimensions; as of length and breadth also; to wit, Triangles for commanders in warre, to range their battailes thereby; Quadrangles, for building, because they are most sound and fast-standing; and other figures, wreathed, bulked, longer-one-way-then-other; Ovalls, Lozenges, and Rounds; all which are set-downe particularly in the Commentaries of Candales, Pellitier, Clauius, and others vpon Euclide.
21. Here measure. In the third place hee propounds certaine figures, called Bodies solide; because they haue both length, breadth, and thicknesse. As the Cube, fouresquare euery way, like a dye; the Dodecacdron, of twelue corners or angles; the Cylinder, long and round like a rouller; the Pyramis, which hath three or foure corners in base, and but one aboue in point. These foure, together with the Sphere (which is round through all dimensions) are called the fiue Bodies regular; whereof Euclide and his Expositors haue spoken at large in their sixt booke: as they haue also many propositions touching the same before.
22. The Globe. This is a kind of Geometricall Solide most excellent and perfect aboue all others; as all men, that haue written thereof, doe plainly declare: whom the Poet here also followeth. Their chiefe reasons are,
- 1. That it hath the same fashion and shape, that the world hath.
- 2. That it hath neither beginning, mids, nor end.
- 3. That it is moueable in place, and immoueable out of place. That it is concaue and conuex, which is as much to say, as Inbent and Out-bent, or crusye and bulked; that it is made of straight lines, meaning the diameters, and yet crooked round about, as is the surface thereof; that it mooueth euery way at once, vpward, downward, backward, forward, rightway, leftway; that it swayes and mooues with it, according [Page 152] to proportion, all round bodies next it: This we may well perceiue by that heauen called Primum mobile, which drawes with it the firmament of fixed starres, together with the seauen spheres of Planets: That, although it stand still, as when the sphere is laid on a plaine; yet seemes it to be in continuall motion, and euery way nods and threatens to fall, because the base or foot it stands-on is but a point, from whence on euery-side halfe hangs-ouer. This may seeme strange then, euen where there is a foundation to rest-on. Much more in the Earth, that hath no foundation to sense, but hangs in the Ayre; whereof the Poet giues a good reason; because it selfe is the resting-place, or middle point, of all the bodies concentrike, and round of it selfe, is not by any promontorie or corner forced from abroad. More ample reasons hereof shall yee finde in the Commentaries of Clauius, Junctinus, Schreckensuschius, and others, vpon the Spheare of Iohn of Hallifax, commonly called Iohannes de sacro Bosco; and in the Commentarie of Millichius vpon the second booke of Plinie.
- 4. The Sphere is alwaies and euery where throughout like it selfe; so are not other bodies Geometricall.
- 5: As houses that are blunt-cornerd, receiue more into them, then do the straight or sharp-cornerd; because these stride not so wide as the other: so the Sphere being (as it were) euery way blunt, containes more then any Geometricall bodie of other shape.
- 6. Other Solides are broken oft-times, by reason of their beginnings, ends, plights, knobs and ioynts: whereas the Sphere is voide of all those; and therefore must needs be more perfect and sound; as all Astronomers and Geometricians doe proue both by their owne experience, and to the view of others.
23. The doubling of a Cube, and squaring of a Round. About these two secrets of Geometrie diuers learned men of our Age haue taken great pains; as well in their Commentaries vpon Euclide, as in Bookes and Treatises printed apart. But because these matters doe require demonstrations with distinct number and figure, it was impossible for me to set them downe here; and my ayme is at things of more vse and profit. He that would be further satisfied herein, let him repaire to the learned Mathematicians, or to their Bookes set forth in Print. Nicolas de Cusa, Orontius, Cardan in his worke de proportionibus, Pelletier, Clauius, & Candales, in diuers demonstrations vpon [Page 153] Euclide, haue largely discoursed vpon these Secrets, and others drawing neere vnto them.
24. Keepe faster. The Theoremes, Problemes and Propositions of Geometrie, contained in the books of Euclide are most certaine, and out of all controuersie, among people endued with reason; as the Expositors of this Author doe plainly shew. Howbeit the Sceptikes and Pyrrhonians, both old and new, do oppose them. But the Poet simply considers the truth of things, reiecting all Sophistrie; which deserues not to be disputed withall, especially when it denies principles; and such as these, whereby Geometrie hath filled the whole world, and that but a hundred yeares since, with an infinite sort of rare and admirable inuentions.
25. By her the gentle streame. For proofe of that last point, he brings in
- 1. The vse of Wind-mills and Water-mills.
- 2. Artillerie.
- 3. The Saile, mast, sterne, and other furniture of a ship.
- 4. Printing.
- 5. The Crane or wheele, deuised to draw or lift-vp great stones to a high building; and other Engines, to command and beat downe pyles, planks and whole trees (if need be) into the earth vnder water.
- 6. The Crosse-staffe, or Iacobs-staffe (as we call it) to measure the Earth, Ayre, Heauen and Sea, and vnder this may be comprised all other instruments, which the Surveyours of Land, Camp-masters, Geometors, Astronomers, and other men vse to that purpose, or the like.
- 7. All kinde of howre-glasses, of sand or water, Dyals of all sorts, and sounding clocks, to marke how the time passes both by day and night.
- 8. Certaine statues and deuises of wood, which by meanes of sundry gynnes of motion within them, haue beene made to pronounce some words of mans voice: whereto may be added the woodden Pigeon of Archytas, the Eagle and Flie of Iohn de Montroyall, the brasen head of Albertus Magnus, & the clock-cock of Strausburg.
- 9. The deuise of Daedalus, to flie in the ayre; which hath beene imitated since by others.
In the tenth and last place he glaunceth at the vaunt which Archimedes made, that he would mooue the Earth out of place, if he had but elsewhere to stand. These all deserue throughly to be considered; but for the present I will content my selfe thus only to haue pointed at them. And so come to the third Image, which is Astronomie.
26. Now these two Arts. Without the helpe of Arithmetike and Geometrie (saith our Poet) a man is not able to reach vnto the excellencie of the third: as by the Astronomical Institutions appeareth most plainly.
27. A siluer-bright New-Moone. Here is a fit dresse for Astronomie; The Moone her Coronet, because of all the Globes of Heauen that is neerest vnto vs; and vnder that, her traine is a Blazing starre; because that fierie Meteor, anciently thought to be engendred in the vpper region of the Ayre, and [Page 154] euer vnder the Moone, till of late it hath beene prooued, by the Parallax, to be sometime aboue. By the two Carbuncles here set for her eyes, are meant two bright starres: the blew damaske gowne embrodered with stars and pictures of liuing creatures, is the skie and Zodiack: the two golden clasps or buckles are the Poles: by the plume, or fan of Peacocks feathers, may be meant the starrie firmament, or eighth heauen A description very proper, and representing the whole subiect of Astronomie.
28 But what (quoth Phaleg.) Phaleg asketh Heber concerning the two Globes that Astronomic held in her hands Heber makes answer that in her right hand is the Globe of Sea and Earth: and because there-ouer could not be painted the Elements of Aire and Fire; nor ouer them the heauens of Starres wandring and fixed; the Primum mobile, and Empirean; they are all here together tepresented by ten Circles, whereof I shall speake hereafter: but first concerning the Seas interlacement with the Earth, to make on Globe.
29 ‘— The Sea doth cou'r all eu'ry where,’ But onely in certaine parts d [...]sparpled here and there. All the points hence arising tò be considered, may be drawne to eight Articles.
- 1 Concerning the diuers names of the Sea.
- 2. Concerning the place or Channell thereof.
- 3. To shew the parts thereof, and whether it composse the Earth, and how.
- 4. Why it is not encreased by the waters continually falling into it.
- 5 Concerning the Ebbe and Flow.
- 6. Why the Sea-water is salt.
- 7. Of the Enterlacement of the Sea with the Land.
- 8. Whether the Earth be round or flat.
Of them all in order.
1 For the Names of the Sea, it is called of our Poet, Th'Ocean, Neptune, Neree, and La-Mer. Some thinke this last was drawne from the Latine Amarum, because the Sea-water is salt and bitter. Why not rather of Mare, which commeth of Marath, signifying the same? The word Ocean hath diuers Etymologies. For Suidas holds the Sea so called of a priuatiue turned into [...], and [...] diuido, because the waues thereof so follow one another, as they cannot be seuered. Others deriue it of [...], that signifies Swift; because the Sea hath so quicke a continuall motion. The other two names are meerely poeticall, and vsed by a Metonymie.
2 Now concerning the place or Channell of the Sea: It is said in the 33. Psalme, That God hath gathered the waters together as into a vessell, and heaped them vp as a treasure: Whereto not vnlike is the Philosophers opinion; that the Earth is the Center of the world, girt and compassed (though here and there vncouered) by the Sea; which also falles-into, and filles vp the hollow deepes thereof; and so becomes a huge masse and treasure (as it were) of waters, from whence the Diuine prouidence drawes innumerable Riuers, to runne thorow the vaines and ouer the face of the Earth. And further, that the Sea is not only the receptacle of all riuers thereinto falling; but is also the great store-house of waters, both for the Earth, and Sunne; which haling-vp the steeme of waters from Sea, to mid region of the Aire, makes thereof diuers Meteors, but most store of Raine. Our Terrestriall Globes, and the report of Pilots and Nauigators, that within this hundred yeares haue t [...]auelled all Seas, make-good that is said of the great bed or channell of the waters. And thereto also accords that which Ouid hath, 1. Metam.
3 Whereas it hath beene aforesaid, in ordering the Elements, that the Water is aboue the Earth; this breeds a scarre to the third Article: for if the Sea lye higher then the Land, and doth the same round about enuiron; how comes it to passe that the Land is not ouerflowed thereby? Considering this Element is not easily kept within bounds; but of a moist and flowing nature, still running downward. But this is before answered in the second Article, where it is said, that the Sea is gathered together on a heape to a large compasse; so as the parts thereof next the land, tending toward the proper Center of their whole masse, draw not from, but rather to the Sea; which hath for maine bed or channell that large extent of the East & West O [...]ean: where, what doe we see (to speake of) but waters? For a few Islands, here and there scattered, are nothing to the huge wasternes of the Sea. And that is moued three kinde of waies: One way, as it is Water; another way, as it is the Sea; the third, as it is accidentally forced by the winds. Of the later I will not here speake, but of the two former together. It is the nature, indeed, of all water to runne downwards; but the Sea, as well in proper channell (where it is hoised farre aboue the land) as also in the parts and armes thereof, hath set-limits and bounds which it cannot passe. For so Almightie God the Creator hath ordained; who shut the Sea with do [...]res, when it b [...]ake forth as if it had iss [...]od out of the wombe, Iob. 38.8. Who bound the Sea with Sand, by a perpetuall decree, which it cannot passe; and though the waues thereof tosse themselues, yet can they not preuaile; though they roare, yet can they not passe ouer it, Ier. 5.22. and diuers like places there are in holy Scripture. Now, whereas the Sea and Land doe make one Globe together, certaine it is that the highest part of the Land is commonly furthest from the sea, as plainly appeares by the current of Riuers; and the highest of Sea furthest from Land. This also is proued by diuers of the learned, and men expert in Nauigation; who say, that comming to land, they perceiue the Sea still to decline, and that vnder the Equator it is higher than in any place else: the reason is (I thinke) because there it hath in furface the largest compasse, and highest Arch of a Circle, or Globe; as appeares by the Card. How then doth the Sea compasse and enuno on the whole Earth? First by the great body thereof, which is the Ocean; then by the Midland-sea, the Sound, and other like Bayes; by the Cimbrian, Arabian, Persian Gulphes; and many other little Seas and great Riuers; which are to that bodie, as armes, legges, vaines and haire, whereby it is ioyned to the Earth. The particulars of both are plainly set forth vnto vs, both in our globy and flat Mappes of the world; that I need say no more of them.
4 For the fourth Article we must consider this; that the Earth so enuironed with Sea is a spongie & poicus body, full of channels & conduit-pipes; both neare her ouer-face, and thorow her inner parts euery way: whereby it comes to passe, that all the great streams arising of little springs and fountaines farre from Sea, and, before they come there, encountring and bearing with them an ininite company of land flouds, brookes, and small tides; yet encrease not the Sea; which affords so much water to the [Page 161] whole Earth by her secret waies afore-said. As for the Snow and Raine, which falleth sometime in great plentie, to encrease the waters: this is but an exchange that the Aire still makes in paying that againe which it borrowed of the Sea. Yet aboue all is the power and wisdome of God the Creator to be thought-on, who by his onely will and command keepes so the waters heapt-together in his great Magazin of the Sea; which otherwise, both by reason of their nature, and daily encrease, would ouerflow all, as they did before God commanded the dry-land to shew it selfe: then fled they at the voice of their Maker, as it is said in the 104. Psalme, And beholding the shore stopt their course there; yea ran againe backward, as fearing their Master.
5 Hereupon it folleth out fit, that I speake somewhat of the Seas Ebbe and Flow. This is the right and proper motion thereof, considered, not as water, but as the Sea. The Poet in the third day of his first weeke, shewes diuers opinions concerning this Ebbe and Flow. Some thinke that when the waters were first commanded to retire and shew the dry-land, God gaue them this perpetuall motion; which as a ballance, whereof the Equator is beame, doth rise and fall without ceasing; and hath this vertue from the Primouable; and shall continue it to the worlds end. But the learneder sort hold the Moone, by her diuers apparitions of waxing and waining, to cause this motion of the Sea. Whereunto the Poet also, in place aboue-quoted, seemes to encline. Some say also the Sunne helpes it forward, and breeds great alteration in the masse of waters, by his great heat and brightnesse: because it is obserued that alwaies, when the Sunne and Moone are in coniunction, the Seas Ebbe and Flow is greatest: but this also comes specially by the Moone; as by some reasons here following shall further appeare. The holy Scripture indeed here, as all where else mining the wonderous order of Nature, teacheth vs to lift vp our thoughts to God the Creator; who stirres and stayes the Sea, how and when it pleaseth him: yet may we say neuerthelesse, that herein he commonly doth vse the seruice of second causes; though keeping still to himselfe the soueraigne authority ouer them all; so as he can hinder, change, and vtterly destroy them at his pleasure. With this acknowledgement consider we these Inseriour causes. Plutarch in his third booke of the Philosophers Opinions, Chap. 17. showes what they thought of old time concerning the T [...]des and alterations of the Sea. Some (he saith) ascribe the cause of them to the Sunne and Winds; others to the Moone; a third sort, to the high-rising of waters in generall; a fourth, to the swelling of the Atlanticke Sea. Now he distinguishes the motion into three kinds; to wit, the Streame, and that is naturall; the Floud, and that is violent; the Ebbe, and that is extraordinarie. As for the Floud, it is a motion of the Sea water, rising and falling twice in some and twentie houres; whereby the Sea is purged and cleansed, by certaine periods answerable to the rising and setting of the Moone. It is in the n [...]ame Ocean, open to the winds, that the sloud is strongest, but appears chiefe [...]y by the shore-side, & where it is not checkt or staid by some islāds. The Midland Sea hath not the Tide: In the Adriatike and other like Bayes there [Page 162] is searse any. The Baltique hath none at all; because it is so straightned and bound with land euery way, and is so full of Islands. If the Moone be in the waine, or past the first qua [...]ter, the Tide is euery where weake; but neare the new Moone, or full, it waxeth very strong: and this is held to be the reason, because this Planet being so neere vnto vs, and hauing Domimon ouer all moisture, encreaseth the waters, and drawes them to and fro, as she riseth or setteth: for where she setteth vnto vs, shee riseth vnto the other Hemisphere. The Ebbe and Flow is sometime more slow and gentle, sometime more swift and violent, according as the Moone waineth or waxeth: but herein must we note also the diuers seasons of the yeare; together with the winds, which helpe or hinder much the Tides, and cause them to runne more swift or slow. This power hath the Moone by motion of the Primouable; which maketh her tise and set, as the Sunne and other Starres doe, in the space of a day. When she riseth, the sea begins to swell, till shee come to the Medridian or Moone-line of any place; and from thence abateth all the while she is tending to the set: then the Sea descends with her, till she come toward the Counter-Meridian; where the water is againe at the highest, and falles till she rise againe to this our Hemisphere. So whereas the Tides keepe no certaine hower, but are sometime sooner, sometime later; the cause is, that, though the Moone be whirled about with motion of the Primouable; yet, hauing proper motion in latitude of the Zodiacke, thwarting that other, she riseth not alwaies at the same time, nor in the same Signe, not with the same light and distance from the Sunne; nor with the same coniunction and aspect of other Planets and fixed Stars: all which cause a difference, and are some more, some lesse disposed to the encrease of waters. And these Sea-waters doe also much differ in nature: Some are cleare and purified, and haue roome enough; these flow moderately, but higher; others muddy, thicke, and kept-in with straights; which runne with more violence, though not with so high a Tide. This hath God appointed to cleanse and preserue the waters: for in time of calmes they grow ranke, and the Sea sends-vp ill vapours; being the great sinke (as it were) of corrupt matter, which is to be scummed and cleansed by the Tides and winds. These also doe serue for Nauigation; but chiefly to magnifie the Creators wonderfull power; when wee see thereby, and consider how truly it is said in the Psalme 107.23. and 24. They that goe dawne to the Sea in sh [...]ps, and occupie their busiaesse in great waters, doe see the workes of the Lord, and his wonders in the deepe, &c. For that huge masse of salt-water yeelds it selfe captiue (as it were) to the Moone-beames, and thereby is easily commanded. I will enter no further into the cause of this Miracle, but, lest I be too long in these notes, leaue those to search it deeper, that are more able.
6 Concerning the bitter and saltnesse of the Sea-water, Plutarch hath spoke thereof, in his booke of the Philosophers Opinions, 3.16. see what he saith there; and in the ninth question of his first booke of Table-talke, and in the first question of his Naturall causes. Aristotle in the 23. Section of his Problemos. Pliny in his second booke, from the 97. chap. to the 101. [Page 163] where he assoiles the most obiections that are made concerning this point of the Sea: but especially in the 110. he ascribes there to the Sunne the Saltnesse of Sea-water at the top, not at the bottome. With him agrees Mellichius vpon the same Chapter of Plinie: Garcaeus in the 36. Chapter of his Meteorologie: Danaeus in his Christian Physickes, 2.11. And Velcurio in his Comment vpon Aristolles Naturall Philosophie, 3.7.
7 Of the seuenth Article enough hath beene said in the third, and the Terrestriall Globe and Mappes doe make all very plaine.
8 There rests, for the eight Article a word to be said concerning the forme or shape of the Sea; whether it be round or flat. That which hath beene afore-said, shewes plainly it is round; but neither in it whole selfe, nor parts: how then? Only as it is enterlaced with the whole body of the Earth, and hath for bed the great deepe. If any be so curious, as to seeke herein further satisfaction; let him reade Scaliger against Card. Exercit. 37. &c. So much for these eight Articles touching the Sea.
30 Here should th'Aire. The Poet goes about here to range in proper place both the Elements and Heauens: to wit, The Earth lowest, the Water next thereupon, then the Aire, then the Fire: next ouer these the seuen Planets, and aboue them the Fix-star-heauen embrased with the primouable; and ouer that the glorious habitation of Saints. This is the common opinion of Christian Astronomie, agreed-on by most Winters both of late and former times. Some few, as Copernicus and his followers, gainsay it: but the Poet takes after that opinion, which is most likely and most receiued.
31 Among the greater Six The Terestriall Globe hath Ten Rings or Circles; six great ones; so called, because they diuide the Sphere after the full compasse thereof into equall parts: and foure called leste, because they diuide it into parts vnequall. The first of the great, here mined by the Poet, is the Equator or Equinoctiall, which I tearme The Circl' of Match-day night. This Circle in euery part therof is like distant from the Poles of the world: diuideth the Globe into two equall parts, and is the greatest of all the Circles: by reason whereof it comes to passe that the Sunne and other Planets haue vnder this a swifter course than other of those heauenly bodies: as contrariwise, they runne slower when they come nearer the Poles. And when the Sunne is vnder this Line, day and night is equall throughout the world, and that caused the name. There are two such times in the yeare; the one called of the Spring the Vernall Equinox, about the eleuenth of March; the other the Autumnall of that Season, and falleth commonly neare the thirteenth of September. For when the Sunne first entreth Aries, or Libra; then is he vnder the Equinoctiall, and stayeth as long aboue, as vnder euery Horison: that is, twelue houres a peece, halfe the naturall day. This and the rest would better be vnderstood with an Armillary Sphere in hand.
32 This other. The second great Circle is called the Zodiake, which diuides the Equator into two equall parts, at the beginning of Aries and Libra, and the one toward the North, is called the Articke halfe, and the [Page 164] other, toward the South, the Antarticke halfe of the Equator. The Zodiake hath other Poles or Axelpoints, than those of the world, and from them also distant 24. degrees: which also in the Globes turning draw-out the Tropicke Circles of Cancer and Capricorne; whereof hereafter.
33 This other passing-through. The Astronomers imagine also two other great Circles, called the Colures, which a man may thinke doe stead the Globe no more than to hold the parts thereof together. For the office that some giue them to distinguish the Night-qualles and Sunstaies, belongeth more properly to the Equator and Tropickes. The Poet here exactly describes the first Colure, and saith it is drawne from one of the Tropickes to the other, to note the staies of the Sunne, who comming thereto neere, goes not so fast as afore.
34 And this here crossing. This is the description of the second Colure, that shewes the equall space betwixt the two Equinoxes, or Eauen-nights of Spring and Autumne, and the two Solstices or Sun-stayes of Summer and Winter. The word Colure comes of the Greeke, [...], which signifies curtolled, or cut off by the taile: because onely one part appeares vnto vs, and the other is hid, and so saith Proclus.
35 And this the circl' of Noon. That is, the Meridian, which passing through the Poles, and our Zenith, or Crowne-point, diuides the Globe into halues, the one East, the other West. It is called the Noon-line, or Meridian, because alwaies when the Sunne by sway of the Primovable comes thereto, at what time or place soeuer, then there it is Noone; and Noone is nothing else but the midday Naturall, or Artificiall: Whereupon it followes, that all Cities vnder the same Meridian stand alike distant from East and West: and contrary-wise, if one be neerer East or West then another, they haue not the same Meridian, but diuers. Th'arke then, or round parcell of th'Equator (reckoning from West to East) which is betweene the Meridian of the Fortunate Isles, and the noon-point of any place or Citie, is colled the longitude or length of that Citie or place; and their Latitude or bredth is the Arke of their Noon-circle from th'Equator to the Crowne-point. Hence also arises the distinction of Climats, implied here in the word Horison, which moueth as farre as you will to North or South. The Ancient Astionomers (saith Appian in the 6. Chapter of his Cosmography) diuided the whole Earth into seuen Climats, or degrees of heat and cold: but we now obserue nine, by reason of our late more exact discoueries. A Climate is a space of the Earth betweene two paralels, or lines of Latitude, differing halfe an houre in Sunne-dyall one from other: for the Sunne drawing from the Equator toward the Poles, must needs make the daies vnequall. And so much is one Climat remoued from the Equato, as makes the daies there differ halfe an houre from the Equinox; from Day-and night-cauen. Heere further is to be noted, that euery Climate takes [...] of [...]: en [...]keble Citie, Riuer, Country, Isle, or Mountaine &c. From the [...]qu [...] then to reckon Northward, the first Climate is c [...]lled of M [...], because it runnes thorow the midst of that Citie in d [...]ke: [...] second of Sie [...], a Citie in Egypt, vnder the Tropick of Ca [...]: the third, of Alexandria; the fourth, of [Page 165] Rhodes; the fift, of Rome; the sixt, of Pontus; the seuenth, of Boristhenes; the eight, of the Riphean hills; and the ninth, of Denmarke: And Southward, the same with note of opposition, or relation; as the first is Counter-Me [...]oe, the second Counter-Sie [...], and so the rest.
36 The Winter Tropicke. Hauing spoken of the six great Circles in the Sp [...]ere, he comes now to handle the foure lesse; whereof two are cal [...]ed Tropicks or Turnes, one of Winter, the other of Summer. The Winter-Tropicke circle is made or drawne by the Sunne first entring into Capricorne; whereof it is called also the Tropicke of Capricorne, and fals out nigh the 12. of September, with the Winter Sunne-stay: for then the Sunne [...]ay goe no further from vs, but turnes againe toward vs; and thence hath this Circle the name: as also that other Tropicke of Cancer, which is the Summer Sun-stay or Turnagaine of the Sunne then entring into Cancer, (about the 12. of Iune) and mounting no higher aboue our Horison.
37 The two other small Circles, are the Artick & Antartick, both equally distant from the Equator, and easie to be obserued in the Maps, both flat and round. They are imagined, for Astronomy-sake, to be drawne by the Poles of the Zodiack mouing about the fixed Poles of the world; one at North, the other at South. That of the North is called the Artick or Beare-circle, of that Pole so neere ar markable Starre in taile of the little Beare; I say so neere, because, although it be commonly called the Pole-starre, yet is it some foure degrees from the Pole: that of the South is called Antartick, because it is opposite to the other Circle and Pole, and hath not (no more then the South-pole it selfe) as yet got any other proper name: though some that haue that way sayled, haue obserued, about the South-pole, one great and faire Starre called Can [...]pus; and others take notice of foure, which [...]ey call the Crosse.
38 The Ball she b [...]ares. After description of the Globe Terrestriall, hee comes to the Celestiall, the Globe of Heauen; wherein are set downe, from either side of the Equator to the Poles, the suadry Constellations, according to the diuers names and figures, which the Astronomers haue giuen them; to shew in what sort they worke vpon the lower bodies on earth, and to make their postures and distances the better obserued.
39 I neuer see them looke. By a daintie comparison he toucheth, in few verses, vpon the chiefe point of Astronomie; concerning the Aspects, influences, and wonderfull operations of the Setstars and Planets; according to their sundry coniunctions and distances (beside their proper motions) caused by the heauens admirable whirlung-about. To speake of these, their aspects, and glauncings one at another, in Triangle, Quadrangle and Sextile, whereupon the Astrologers make their discourse and iudgement, would require a long Comment. Reade the third booke of the Diuinations of learned Peucer.
40 Then Phaleg said, how is't. Phaleg (as the Poet makes him) imagining all these strange & vgly shapes, which Astronomers haue deuised, were by the Creators selfe so drawne-out and limbed on the ouerface of heauen, asketh Heber the reasons thereof: who nameth diuers, here cunningly set [Page 166] forth by the Poet. The first is taken from the consideration of Gods infinite wisdome. who in the diuers proportions of so many bodies, hath engrauen most manifest arguments of his owne greatnesse and power. The second is, that the ancient Astronomers, well weighing the powerfull effects of these heauenly Signes, gaue them names most answerable to their properties As in the Zodiack (to omit the rest) there is
- 1. the Ram,
- 2. the Bull,
- 3. the Twynnes,
- 4. the Crab,
- 5 the Lyon,
- 6. the Virgin,
- 7. the Ballance,
- 8. the Scorpion,
- 9. the Archer,
- 10. the Goat,
- 11. the Water bearer,
- 12. the Fishes.
Of those Marsilius Ficinus, in his Comment vpon Ficinus Platonicus (3. lib. Ennead. 2.) hath in few words to this effect. The old Heathen Philosophers did set the Ram first of all the Signes in the Zodiack, in honour of Iupiter Ammon, whom also they were wont to paint with two hornes on his head: The Bull followes next, because when the Sunne comes there, the earth is fit for tillage: In third place, the Twynnes, for increase and multiplication of all things then springing and engendring: After these comes the Crab, because the Sunne in that Signe begins to recoyle and go backward: then the Lyon, because there the Sunne is most hot and fiery coloured: then the Virgin, because the earth at that time scorched with heat of the Sunne, is barren, or like a Maide brings forth no encrease: then the Skoales or Ballance, because the Sunne therein weigheth (as it were) the day and night, and makes them equall: then the Scorpion, so called, because the Sunne is there gone so far of, that the Ayre begins to stnoteng vs with cold: and therefore the rather next followes the Archor: so named for the piercing cold of his arrowes driuen with the wind. The Goat hath the next place, because the Sunne there begins againe to raise vp himselfe, as a Goat doth to brouse: The two last are allotted vnto the Waterman & Fishes, for the much raine and moist season of Ianuarie and February. Some say otherwise; that these Signes, and the rest, had their names from the posture of starres in their sundry constellations. Let me ioyne hereto (as it will be are the translating) that which Macrobius hath in the first booke of his Saturnals, chap. 21. The Aegyptians when they would consecrate an Image for the Sunne, they made it with the head halfe-shauen and hairie on the right side This haire kept-on doth import that the Sunne is neuer quite hidden, or hindred from his working vpon naturall things: but the shauen haire, whose roots yet are left, sheweth that this glorious Planet euen when we see him not, hath power like haire to rise and grow againe vpon vs. Hereby also they signified that time of yeare when the day close-powled (as it were) is at the shortest; which men of old time called the Winter-Sun-stay, in Latine So [...]stitium brumale, of Bruma, drawne from [...], Short day. Thence the Sunne thrusting vpward againe, out of the secret places where he lay (as it were) hid, enlargeth his course, and preuailes euen to the Sun-stay of Summer; which is counted his kingdome; and therefore the Egyptians haue consecrated the beast that stands in Zodiack, where the Sunne hath yearely greatest heat: and call that Signe of the Lyon, the house of the Sunne, because the substance of that beast seems to be drawne from the nature of that Planet. For first he surpasseth [Page 167] all other beasts in force and heat, as the Sun doth other Starres: then as the Sun in the forepart of the day and yeare, hath his force still increasing till Noone or Summer, and then growes weaker and weaker till Set, which is the weakest part of the day; and Winter which is the weakest of the yeare; euen so is the Lyon made strong before, small and weake behinde. Moreouer, it is obserued, that the Lyon hath his eyes alwaies open and sparkling; as the Sunne with an open and vnweariable eye, lookes on the round world continually. Thus of that Signe, though all the rest also are held by good reason agreeable to the nature of the Sunne. To begin with the Ram; See the great agreement: For he, during the six moneths of Winter, vseth to lye on his left side; and all the rest, from the Spring to Winter againe, on his right: as the Sunne also, from the Equinox or Euen-night of Spring runs the right side- Hemisphere, and at the other Euen-night changes to the left: and for that cause Iupiter Ammon, the supposed Sunne-setting god of Libya, is fained to haue the hornes of a Ram; wherein lies the force of that beast, as the force of the Sunne is in his beames: The Greekes also call him [...], a Ram, of [...], a horn. Now, that the Bull hath some correspondence with the Sunne, the Egyptian Idolatry shewes it by diuers instances: one, that in Heliopolis (i. the Citie of the Sunne) they chiefely worship a Bull called Netiros, consecrate to the Sunne: Another, because the Citie of Memphis honours the Bullocke Apis for the Sunne: a third is, that in a stately Temple of Apollo at Herminthi they consecrate to the Sunne, and worship a Bull, which they call Bacchis, there famous for diuers miracles agreeable to the nature of the Sunne: for his haire growes backward contrary to the nature of other beasts; and therein they hold him like the Sunne, striuing against the course of Heauen: they say also that he changes his colour euery houre in the day. What to make of this I the Translator know not; except it imply the same that Hermes Trismegistus noted, when he saw in Egypt a beast dedicated to Serapis, make-water twelue times of equall distance in a day; and thereby gathered that the day should be diuided into twelue houres, P. Virg. de Inuent. 2.5. and this may haue relation to the Sunne: but I come againe to Macrebius. The Signe of Twinnes, which are taken for Castor and Pollux, that were thought to liue and dye by turnes, what may it better signifie then one and the same Sunne, sometime rising vpon our Hemisphere, sometime going downe to the other? The side-way crawling of the Crab, what better can it meane, then the Sunnes neuer straight, but side-way passing thorow the Signes; and here especially, where he begins to turne from aloft downeward? Of the Lyon we haue said already. The Signe of the Virgin with an care of corne in her hand, what meanes it else, but the power and vertue of [Page 168] the Sunne, whereby that eare and all others are loden with Come? therefore also is this Maiden taken for Justice, which onely causeth all fruits growing to serue mans vse. The Scorpion, and the Ballance likewise, doth wholly represent the Sunnes Nature, which is but cold and starke in Winter, and sunke downe as the lower Scoale; but afterward stirs-vp againe the sting of his inward force, nothing diminished by the late could. Th' Archer which is lowest of al the Signes in the Zodiak, hath the fore-part of a man, and hinder-part of a horse: to shew that the Sunne is fallen from his highest place to his lowest; as it is a strange abasing of a man, to become a beast; yet shootes he an arrow, to signifie that all creatures on earth be cheered and quickned by the Sunne, howeuer farre from them. Vnder the Goat the Sunne begins to aduance himselfe againe from below; and this is the right manner of that beast, who commonly stands on his hinder legges to feed vpon the Rocks aboue him. And doth not the Water bearer shew also the right nature of the Sunne? For how should we haue raine vpon the earth, if the Sunnes hear drew not first the vapours vpward; which being turned into water by the cold mid-region of the Aire falls downe againe in plentifull shewers? In the last place of the Zodiack are the Fishes. These also haue beene consecrated vnto the Sunne; not so much for likelihood of nature, as to shew the force and vertue of that Planet, which maintaines life not onely in the Birds of the Aire, and Beasts of the field; but euen among those Creatures also, which liuing in the water seeme to be vnseene of him. So mighty is the Suns operation, that with his piercing beames he quickneth such things as man would thinke farre out of his reach. So ends the Chapter. Now concerning such Countries as are subiect to the sundry Signes, looke what Ptolomey saith, and what the Poet Manilius in the fouth booke of his Astronomicall Poeme; though many toyes he hath, not agreeing with Ptolomey. Reade also Lucas Gauricus, who in his Geometry hath set downe euery particular. I tell them not here, lest I be too long.
41. But if-so this. Of the aforesaid shapes in heauen, this is the third reason, somewhat more curious then the two former; to wit, that God, from all Eternity conceiuing in himselfe the Idea and paterne of the World, which he meant to create, would haue the models of all earthly things be recorded in the heauens: I call this a curious reason; because if it bee narrowly examined, it will be found but a pretie inuention to embellish a Poeme, wherein a man hath leaue to take any matter, sauouring of trueth or likelihood, to refresh and please the most courteous Readers withall.
42. Yea, were it not. This is the fourth reason, wherein the Poet, with commendable courage, aduentures to blot out of memory the Greeke, Latine and Arabian fables; which with so many gybrish names had soyled (as it were) the face of heauen; and makes Heber say that the names of Constellations on either side the Equator, doe containe the mysteries of Holy Church. First then hee speakes of the North-Pole-Starres, and saith the Chariot (which is commonly called Charles Waine) is the same that carried vp to heauen the Prophet or Seer Elias, 2. King 2. And Bootes is Elizeus there mentioned to with-hold first, and then behold his Masters going away: As for the other names of that kinde here following, any Reader acquainted with the Bible, may conceiue them at first, and what the Poet meanes by them.
43. While Heber sings. The Poet, now hee hath made Heber so largely discourse vpon the reasons of these shapes and names giuen by the Astronomers to the six Starres of both Poles and of the Zodiack, he [...]oynes thereto a notable correction thereof; to auoid two extreames: the one of Zeno, the chiefe Stoicke and his followers; who so tie the first cause (which is God) to the second; that they hold all good or euill successe of our life vnauoydably to [Page 174] depend vpon the Starres. Their opinion touching the necessity of Fate, hath beene fully refuted by many famous men, both old and new Writers; but especially by Saint Auslen in his Bookes De Ciuitats Dei: The other extremitie is that opinion of Iudiciall Astrologers, who make our whole life, from the beginning to the end, liable to the vertue and influence of the heauens. Those also haue beene refuted by diuers of our time, especially by the learned John Picus Earle of Mirandula; and by his Nephew Francis Picus in his Booke intituled De praenotione rerum. Our Author shewes therefore that he vtterly disauoweth such opinions of the Stoicks and Astrologers; whom he tearmeth Caldemen, or Caldeans, because Iudiciall Astrologic was in great vse among that people; as may be gathered out of History; but most out of the Bookes of the Prophets, and Esay chiefely, Chap. 52. at length he shewes the reason (which I touched before) why he brings in this new discourse: namely, to giue the Reader an acceptable pause of recreation, and shew how much he desires that our posteritie may see Heauen cleansed of these Idolls, which the Heathen, by names giuen to the Starres, pretend to haue place there.
44. Now heare we Heb'r againe. Hee begins to discouer the secrets of Astronomy contained in certaine principall words vsed by the professors thereof; which we are now briefely to interpret. Th' Apogee is the Sunnes greatest distance from the earth; as the Perigee his least: for we haue two [Page 176] kinde of distances; one Solsticiall, and the other Excentrick: the Solsticiall is, when the Sunne entring into Cancer, (that is the Signe of the Crab) and, comming neere to our Crowne-point in the Noone-line casteth on vs his beames most directly, which by reflection from the earth become more [Page 177] scorching, sharpe and violent. This distance is not vniuersall, but proper to that Region or Climate whose Crowne-point the Sunne then approacheth neerest. The distance Excentricke (common to the whole world) is, when the Center of the Sunne is come to the highest of his Epicyle, and so put-of farthest from the earth: and thither is he brought by meanes of his particular Orbe, in Center differing from the Center of the earth; and this shewes the meaning of Excentricke and Concentricke. Now, the Sunne is at highest of this kinde a little after the Sunstay of Summer, and at the lowest soone after the Winter Sunstay, whereof before. When he is at the highest, hee seemes very small, and to goe very slowly: at the lowest, a mans eye may discerne him to be much greater, and to passe away swifter. Wherein appeares the wondrous wisdome and prouidence of the Almighty Creator. For so it falling-out, that at the Summer Stay the Sunne is hottest, because of his beames more closely gathered and reflected; and that he tarries there the longer, because of the daies length; therefore God raiseth him vp then into the Apogee, or highest place of his Epicycle, and furthest of-vs; lest running below he should make our heat intollerable. And further, his stay in that place is the longer; darting his beames more perpendicularly, and marching more slowly through the Summer Signes; that he may the better concoct and ripen the Fruits of the Earth. Whereas, in the Winter time, casting his Rayes aslope, and so of lesse force; that the Earth wax not thereby all thorow cold and barren; the Sunne descends into his Perigee, or lowest Chamber, to comfort and maintaine the all-nourishing Element in heat and vigour. And, to the end the cold, which is enemy to fertility and generation, may the better bee driuen away, and the Sunne recouer his higher Signes; from whence he may send downe more comfortable beames; God hath giuen him, about the Winter Stay, great swiftnesse to dispatch his iourney withall. No man will thinke it strange, that considers the huge distance that is betwixt the Apogee and Perigee; that is, betwixt the highest, and lowest station of the Sunne. For the Astronomers cast it vp to the number of 315244. Italian leagues. Besides, that neither the other six Planets, nor the Firmament of six Starres, doe with contrary motion hinder the Sunne in his course, he runnes not directly against the Primouable sway; but byasing a-to-side, and as it were yeelding to that violent motion: that he might the better come to an end of his owne iourney, and draw the other Planets with him. Were it not for this course of the Sunne in Byas, or (as Heraults say) in Bend of the Zodiacke, the sundry Climats and Regions which he comes at by turnes, should not be heatte and cooled in their due seasons; Nay certaine Season should there be none, nor any inequality of night and day; but all in a hoch-poch, all confused: Diuers other benefits of this bendy motion doe the Astronomers declare; who reckon also that the space, from hence to the Sunnes higest point in Apogee, is 4329244. leagues of Italy; and from hence to his lowest, 4014000. Subduct this latter summe from the former, and so for the distance betwixt the Apogee and Perigee, you shall haue, as before, 315244. but enough of this; For one sight of a good Armillarie Sphere will teach more then all these words: yet whoso desires [Page 178] to know more concerning the number of Spheres and Planets, let him reade 1. Bassantin, who sets downe the figures very exactly.
45 Then takes he th' Astrolabe. That is an Instrument flat and round, a foot or lesse in Diameter, of brasse or wood, containing many lines both straight and circular, and inuented long since; though the Author be not certainly knowne (some hold it was the Arabian Messahala, some Ptol [...]mey, some Abraham) to cast and know the motions of these heauenly bodies and their dependances. Some call it the Planisphere, because it hath the Sphere drawne into a Flat. The word is Greeke of [...], a Signe or Starre, and [...] to take, or [...] (which commeth of the same verbe) a bandle to hold by; for hereby we lay-hold (as it were) on the Starres, or take the position and height of them▪ For holding this Instrument by the handle, a skilfull man may soone discouer the braue secrets of Astronomie. As for the parts thereof, there is first a large ring that beares-vp the handle, then the Astrolabe it selfe, which hath two sides: the fore-side, otherwise called the Mother, because shee containes in her wombe (as it were) diuers other tables, seruing for diuers eleuations of the Pole, and the back-side, whereon are drawne sundrie lines and circles: the first of them, next the edge, shewes the degrees of Altitude, whereof there is a double vse; for, applying them to the numbers in border that exceed not ninety, they shew how many degrees the Sunne or other Starre is raised aboue our Horizon, with many commodities thereon depending: and applying them to the numbers below, which goe-on from thirtie to thirtie, they shew the degrees of the Zodiake, where the Signes are written with their names and characters, to know the true place of the Sunne euery day. After these you shall finde set downe other circles, wherein be the twelue Moneths of the yeare, answerable to the Signes, with daies vnto each apart, or two by two, numbred by Fiues or Tens, not exceeding 31. which is the quantitie of the greatest Moneth. This serues to know in what degree of the Zodiacke the Sunne is euery day. Moreouer, there are two Diameter-lines crossing each other in Rectangle at the Center of the Astrolabe; one called the Noone-line, drawne from the Ring by the Center downward; and another from East to West, which represents the generall Horizon, at whose either end indifferently begin the degrees of Altitude aforesaid. Six other small lines there are like Arches, together with the Skale of heights, the Winds, and the Rule turning-about on the backside, whereof we shall speake anon. As for parts of the foreside, called the Mother; there is first a circle or border diuided into 360. degrees, these stand for the Equinoxiall or Eauen night, wherein are by iust measure set downe and distributed the 24 houres of the day, containing each fifteene degrees, and euery degree foure minutes, so as euery houre hath threescore minutes. The wombe (as I said) of this Mother is to beare sundry tables according to the Pole height of sundry places: these tables haue each about their Centers drawne three concentrike circles; whereof the least is the Tropike of Cancer, called in the Sphere the Summer Tropike; where the dry is at longest about the twelfth of lune: the Mid-circle is the Equator, passing close by the beginning of Aries and [Page 179] Libra, in which two places the Sunne makes day and night equall throughout the whole world; to wit, about the eleuenth of March, and the 13. of September. So followes it then, that the greatest circle of these three, which is towards the edge of each table, must be the Tropike of Capricorne, where the day is at shortest, about the twelfth of December. Moreouer, in these Tables there are the Almucantaraths; by that Arabian word is signified the circle of Pole height vpon our Hemisphere, some perfect some imperfect. The first of them stands for the slope Horison, diuiding the world into two parts; whereof the one we see, the other is hid from vs. The Center of the least Almucantarath stands for the Zenith or Crowne point, from whence to the Horison are ninety degrees euery way drawn-out by Twoes, Threes, Fiues, or Tens, according to the capacitie of the Instrument, and distance of the lines; which are so drawne, for the Sunne or other Starre to be thereto applied; as often as a man will take their eleuation aboue the Horizon. Beside these, here are also the Azimuths, or crowne circles; which doe cut euery Almucantarath by Fiues, Tens, or Fifteenes, into 360 degrees, quartered by ninetie, and distinguished one quarter from another by the two principall Azimuths, which are the Meridian, and the Equinoctiall; that passeth from the right East-point by our Zenith to the West. Where we begin commonly to count the degrees of the Quarters Northward and Southward. These are to make knowne in what part of the world the Sun or other Starre riseth and setteth. After these doe follow the vnequall houres, called the houres of the Planets, together with the names and characters of then Planets; the lines of twy light, noone and mid-night; the figures of the twelue houses, the line of the Zodiake, and consequently the directory or Index which turneth about the Instrument at either side, by the brim. Lastly, there is the Hole of the Net or Cob-web, which stands for the Pole of the world; and by the pinne that goes thorow the same Hole are all the tables or plates of the Astrolabe ioyned and held fast together. [Page 177 [180]] Concerning the vse of this Instrument in measuring all heights, bulkes, lengths, breadths, thicknesse and depths, I. Stoster, D. Iaquinot, and I. Bassantin haue largely thereon discoursed in their bookes of the Astrolabe: And what need I take further paines in Englishing more of this Subiect, when the famous Geoffrey Chaucer 233. yeares agoe hath made all so plaine in the best English of his time? Somewhat only must be said of that Alhidode, as the Poet here calles the Rule; it is an Arabian word, in Greeke [...], in Latine Radius: as in Virgil, Descripsit radio totum qui gentibus orbem. It is the turning Rule on the back-side of the Astrolabe, whereon are fastned two square tablets with small sight-holes persed, for the height-taking of Sunne or Starre, and for measuring of quantities aforesaid, or any other vse here specified by the Poet.
46 The pregnant Phaleg yeelds. Hauing shewed the excellence of Astronomie, he comes now to declare by what meanes the knowledge thereof was deriued vnto vs; and saith (as it is most likely) that from the Hebrues it came to the Chaldeans, from them to the Aegyptians, from them to the Arabians, and so to the Italians and Germans, whose names haue beene gathered and set downe by H. Ranzouius, in his Treatise of the excellence of Astronomie.
47. O right Endymions. This is in commendation of the learned Astronomers, and their profession. The Poets faine that the Moone was so in loue with Endymion, that as he slept on a high hill-top, shee came thither to kisse and embrace him. It is thought he was some great Astronomer. At least, this fable was ment of Students in Astronomie, whom our Author for that cause here termeth Right Endymions. The great vse and further commendation of this Art you may reade in Virgil. Georg. 1. Aeneid. 1. & 3. and almost euery where in Ptolomey; but especially in Peucer and such as haue lately written, or prefaced vpon Astrologie.
48 For you (ô heauenly wits.) Shewing that he had a good minde to dilate vpon the praise of this Art, he breaks-off to come to the description of the fourth Image, which is Musick; and her he sets-out with all the most necessarie and gracefull attire, both for voice and instruments of diuers sorts. It requires a long dispute and hard to resolue, what manner of Instruments, and how framed they were, which we reade by translated names to haue beene in vse among the Hebrues, Greeks, and other people of old time. This would take-vp a whole Volume; as also that other question, what was their vocall Musicke; whereof Plutarch and Boetius both haue treated. I perswade my selfe they had in those dayes a kinde of skill in making and managing their musicall Instruments, and ioyning voice thereto; which is hardly well knowne or conceiued now of vs: though some of our Musicians we finde both in voice and vpon instrument so exceeding skilfull, that they are able much to moue our affections; but short of that wonderfull power which hath been ascribed to the ancient Musicke.
49. Sith eu'ry Sphere (they say.) The Poet vpon this occasion of Musicke, raiseth himselfe to consider the accord and harmony of the Heauens; borrowing his discourse from the Philosophie of Plato: whereof I shall endeuour here to set downe the summe He saith then that our Musicke on earth is but a shadow of that superlatiue harmonie which God hath ordained the great Cymbals (as it were) of heauen to make, by their so swift and orderly mouing: sithence vnlikely it is, but that the Primovable and other Spheres, that whirle-about continually and haue done so long, should make some noise answerable to their compasse and cadence so proportionall. And rather may we presume they make a most excellent melody, and far exceeding our earthly Musicke, which from that heauenly borroweth her perfection. For so it being, that God hath made all things in number, weight and measure, very likely it is that he kept a due proportion in the heauens; and that more exactly than on the earth: because this is the lowest part of all, for habitation of the meanest creatures; when they (as their English name signifies) are heauen-vp on high, to make a beautifull and glorious palace for th'All-Creator. To consider the matter yet more particularly; the Platonikes doe say, that God (who is the Voice Soueraigne, and giueth voice, sound, and harmony to all things, high and low) hath in euery Sphere of heauen set an Intelligence (some call it Scule; some, Angell; some, morion quickned by the Primouable) whereby the heauens are moued to their cadence appointed, so exactly as no melody can be more pleasing. As for mine owne opinion hereof, I thinke the Platonicks (who say also that God still exerciseth Geometry) meant hereby to commend the perfection of Mathematicks, and chiefely Astronomy; which is most excellent and certaine of them all. And because the minde is maruellously delighted with Musicall proportions, which no where can be found more perfect then in the heauens; who so hath the gift to vnderstand them, enioyes a contentment surpassing all sweetnesse of earthly and eare-pleasing Musicke. Now, to the end this heauenly Musicke may be the better conceiued; our Poet here vseth a very choice and daintie comparison, and saith the Spirit of God [Page 185] giues the heauens a Musicall motion, which breeds a sweet harmony among them; euen as an Organist by due fingring the keys of his Instrument stirres vp therein a melodious sound. Thus much by the way; that the Reader may thereby take occasion to stop his eares against the tempestuous broyles and discords of this world, and raise-vp himselfe toward this heauenly concord; or rather to fly-vp thither with the wings of faith, and learne, in the company of Saints and blessed Soules, to vnderstand those excellent Songs, which are partly set-downe for vs in diuers passages of the Apocalyps.
50. Now all these counter-notes. Leauing that heauenly Musicke of the Spheres, he shewes now that we haue a Musicke also contained euen in the humors of our bodies, answerable to the foure Seasons of the yeare and the Elements: Our Melancholy, like the Earth and Winter Season, holds the Basse; our Phleme, like the Autume time, and Element of Water, the Tenor; our Blood, like the Spring and Aire, the Counter-tenor, which runnes through all kinde of Notes; our Choller, as the Summer time, and Fire, the Treble: as for all other parts vsed in Musicke, they are euer correspondent to some one of these foure.
51. See then the cause. He speakes now of the effect and power of Musicke. The Platonicks held the soule of Man to be composed of numbers and proportions, the excellence whereof is chiefely in the heauens: whereupon it ensues that Musicall harmony, somewhat partaking with the nature of ise and soule, diuersly mooues and affects all liuing Creatures capable thereof. The Poet plaies vpon this opinion, but still with a caueat, that the truth and ground of this doctrine be rightly vnderstood: For mans Soule is not made of numbers, as the word is simply taken: but thus much onely meanes the Platonist, that these spirituall substances enclosed in mans body are so exquisite, and (as it were) harmonious, that all harmony concord, and proportion delights them and contrariwise all discord and disproportion, or confused noyse offends them, as we see by daily experience. Furthermore, he that hath created all things in perfect concord and proportion, would euen in such as seeme farthest from well agreeing, haue the force of Musicke shew it selfe, [...]y the attention it commandeth of hearers, and by their loue and reuerence thereof. Whereupon I boldly dare auouch that soule not well ordered in it selfe, or not well fitted with a body, which cannot abide sweet harmony
52. Sweet Harmony. In twelue verses here the Poet sets-out the force of Musicke, both in regard of men and beasts: whereof we finde in ancient History very notable examples; as Te [...]a [...]der, Timotheus, Ari [...], and others, wh [...]by their Musicke haue done great wonders; made the most offended to be friends one with another; the most melancholy and sad, to bee merry; fooles, to be wise; and sum as were like to runne mad for loue, to be stayed; and what not? It is reported also, that against the Ph [...]l [...]gies poyson, there [...]n helpe to ready and oueraigne as the well ordered sound of Musicall Instruments▪ See what Ae [...]an, P [...]y, and Plutarch [...]y thereof.
53. O what's to Musicke hard. He goes on yet further, and shewes how Musicke is able to preua [...]e euen with God himselfe. And this he proues by [Page 186] three examples; the first of Soul, (1. Sam. 10.) who meeting a company of Prophets with Instruments of Musicke, began also to prophesie among them; the second, of Elizeus (2. King. 3.) who called for a Minstrell; and when the Minstrell played, the hand of the Lord (that is his Spirit) came vpon the Prophet: the third, of God, anger appeased by deuout singing of Psalmes; and namely those of Dauid, which in the mouth of Gods faithfull seruants are of wonderfull power; as by many particulars of these and former times may well be proued. For God indeed hath promised to be neere vnto all those that call vpon him faithfully, Psal. 145.18. And it becommeth well the righteous to reioyce in the Lord and be thankfull, Psal. 33.1. To conclude, here is the effect of a zealous prayer, wherein heart, voice and accent runne together, most liuely set-out by the Poet, describing with most elegant similitudes the fierce wrath of God against sinne, and the sweetnesse of his mercy, when he is appeased.
54. But now as Heb'r had thought. The Poet intending to make here an end of the second day of his second weeke, brings-in Canan the sonne of Cham, to seeke (as it were by Fate) along the bankes of Iordaine, for the Countrey that was after to be inhabited by his posteritie. So he comming toward the Pillar, breakes-off the learned conference that was betwixt the other two. And here therefore shall end our Commentary-Notes vpon these high conceits of this excellent Poet.
The Epistle to the Lord Admirall. 1596.
WEighing how neare it concernes your Honourable Charge, what strangers passe the Seas into England; I was thereby, and otherwise in humble dutie, moued, to giue your Lordship first intelligence of this Gentleman, whom I haue newly transported out of Frame: and also thought it necessary to craue your fauourable protection of him in this his trauell. A worthy man is he (my Lord) in his owne Countrie, howsoeuer here disguised, and one of the sonnes of that Noble and Diuine Poet LE SIEVR DV BARTAS; in my simple iudgement the properest, and best learned of them all, I am sure the best affected to England, and the gracious Empresse thereof: for which cause I made speciall choise of him, and doe therefore the rather hope to finde fauour on his behalfe with your Honourable Lordship; whose loyaltie to the Crowne, the Prince by trust of so high an Office; whose loue to the Land, the people by ioynt consent of daily felt vertues, haue so fully witnessed, that the fame thereof hath spred it selfe farre beyond that your admirable Regiment. In so much as this gentle stranger, though he were at the first vnwilling, Vl [...]sses-like, to leaue his natiue soile, especially now in this dangerous sea-faring time, while all the world is in a manner troubled with Spanish Fleets; yet after he called to minde what he had heard and written of the mightie Goddesse of the English Ocean, and who there swayed the Trident vnder her, trusting vpon such a Neptune, he went aboord with a good courage, and doubting not at all but that the proud Spanish Carackes, if they be not yet sufficiently dismaid by the wracke they suffered in their former aduenture, but dare againe attempt the like, be they neuer so many more or greater than they were (if more and greater they can be) shall againe, by the grace of God, directing (as before) the courage and wisdome of Englands renowned Admirall, be dispersed ouer the frowning face of our disdainfull Seas, and drunken with salt waues, regorge the bodies of their presumptuous Pilots. And so (my Lord) with a fauourable wind, breathing directly from the French Helicon, by the safe conduit of your Honourable name, and helpe of the Muses, at length I landed my stranger in England. Where since his arriuall he hath gladly encountred diuers of his elder brethren, that were come ouer before, some in a princely Scottish attire, others in faire English habits, and to the intent he might the better enioy their company, whh by this time had almost forgotten their French, he was desirous to learne English of me: therefore I kept him a while about mee, was his teacher at home, and enterpreter abroad; and now that he hath gotten such a smattering of the tongue, as hee can (so as hee can) speake for himselfe, may it please your good Lordship to talke with him at your leisure: though I know you vnderstand very well his naturall speech, I am of opinion it will much delight you to heare him vtter such counterfeit English, as in so little [Page]time I was able to teach him. He can say somewhat of the godly gouernment of good Princes, & the wicked practises of Tyrants, as well in compassing as maintaining a Scepter, both worthy your Lordships hearing for the manner sake, though the matter be not vnknowne to your wisdome. But some other things he doth report very strange, as of NIMROD, that was the first Tyrant of the world, after the time of Noah, the first Admirall of the world: his aspiring minde and practises in seeking the peoples fauour, his proud and subtile attempt in building the Tower of Babel, and Gods iust punishment thereof in confounding the language of the builders. Very truly reckoneth he (that which few doe consider) the great and manifold inconueniences, that are befallen mankinde by the diuersitie of tongues. Further, he can tell of speech in generall, whether man speake by nature, or haue but onely an aptnesse to speake by vse, and whether any other creature haue the like: as for seuerall speeches, he can prooue, with many goodly reasons, which is the best and most ancient of them all; what altereth each tongue, what continueth each in account, what languages are in greatest regard now-adaies, and what Authors haue most excelled in them. And vpon occasion of the English tongue, my Lord, he setteth-out in such manner the Queenes princely Majesty, her learning, wisdome, eloquence, and other excellent vertues, that I know your noble and loyall heart will greatly reioice to heare it, at the mouth of such a stranger. The rest, if it be more curious, then for the States weightie affaires, your L. may intend to heare, I wish referred vnto those goodly young Gentlewomen, your noble and father-like-minded Sonnes, whom after your L. I doe most of all honour: there shall they finde profit so blended with pleasure, learning with delight, as it may easily win their hearts, already vertuously aspiring, from the wanton and faining Cantoes of other Syren-Poets (wherewith many young Gentlemen, and chiefely those of greatest hope, are long and dangerously mis-led) vnto a further acquaintance with this heauenly-Poeticall Writer of the truth: who is now growne into such a liking of this Country, chiefely for the peaceable gouernment thereof (blessed be that Gouernor) and free course of the Gospell (God continue it, and send the like into France) that he is desirous to become a Freedenizen; and hoping further to be an eye-witnesse of Gods wonderfull mercies towards this Land, whereof in France he spake but by heare say, to behold that precious Northerne Pearle, and kisse her Scepter-bearing hand, whose worthy praise he hath sung so sweetly, he humbly beseecheth your gracious fauour to be enfranchised, which if it may please you to grant (my Lord) vouchsafing also the patronage of him; that vnder seale of your Honorable name he may escape the carping censures of curious fault-finders, and enioy all honors, priuileges, liberties and lawes, that belong euen to the naturall inhabitants of this noble Isle, my selfe will vndertake to Fine for him, at least hearty praiers for your daily encrease of honor, and all such obedience, as it shall please your L. to impose:
[Page] [Page] [Page] [Page] [Page] [...] [Page] [Page] [...] [Page] [...] [Page] [...] [Page] [...] [Page] [...] [Page] [...] [Page] [...] [Page] [...] [Page] [...] [Page] [...] [Page] [...] [Page] [...] [Page] [...] [Page] [...] [Page] [...] [Page 1] [...] [Page 1] [...] [Page 2] [...] [Page 2] [...] [Page 3] [...] [Page 3] [...] [Page 4] [...] [Page 4] [...] [Page 5] [...] [Page 6] [...] [Page 7] [...] [Page 8] [...] [Page 9] [...] [Page 9] [...] [Page 10] [...] [Page 10] [...] [Page 11] [...] [Page] [Page 143] [...] [Page 144] [Page 145] [...] [Page 146] [...] [Page 148] [...] [Page 149] [...] [Page 149] [...] [Page 149] [...] [Page 150] [...] [Page 150] [...] [Page 151] [...] [Page 151] [...] [Page 152] [...] [Page 153] [...] [Page 154] [...] [Page 154] [...] [Page 155] [...] [Page 155] [...] [Page 156] [...] [Page 156] [...] [Page 157] [...] [Page 157] [...] [Page 158] [...] [Page 158] [...] [Page 159] [...] [Page 160] [...] [Page 161] [...] [Page 162] [...] [Page 163] [...] [Page 164] [...] [Page 165] [...] [Page 166] [...] [Page 167] [...] [Page]